TRM303 - [PROJECT.TOC] Government...PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES 3.1.1 Contractor Responsibilities 3.1.2 Alterations to Utilities 3.1.3 Interruptions

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR DUPLEX PRINTING

Decatur Mooring Cells

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK01 22 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES01 32 01 PROJECT SCHEDULE01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS01 35 50 PROJECT SITE SECURITY AND AT/OPSEC PROCEDURES01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL01 45 00.15 RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONTRACTOR MODE(RMS CM)01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS01 95 00 FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 31 01 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 97 02 PAINTING: HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL31 41 16 METAL SHEET PILING

-- End of Project Table of Contents --

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1


SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS


SECTION 01 00 00

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.3 ACCIDENT PREVENTION 1.4 GOVERNMENT ACCESS TO WORK SITE 1.5 EVALUATION OF CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 1.7 COORDINATION CONFERENCES 1.8 VETERANS EMPLOYMENT EMPHASIS FOR U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS

CONTRACTS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES 3.1.1 Contractor Responsibilities 3.1.2 Alterations to Utilities 3.1.3 Interruptions of Utilities

-- End of Section Table of Contents --

SECTION 01 00 00 Page 1


SECTION 01 00 00

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

This section comprises an explanation of the general contract requirements needed to accomplish the work for the items described in the bidding schedule. This section is not intended to be all encompassing in the descriptions. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the procedures prescribed in the specifications and contract drawings. A detailed scope of work is described in Section 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK.

1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No separate payment will be made for the work covered under this section, except as otherwise provided. The costs thereof shall be included in the item to which the work pertains. Payment for the work required under this contract will be made as listed in the bidding schedule and as described in Section 01 22 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES.

1.3 ACCIDENT PREVENTION

Accident prevention requirements for this project are stated in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

1.4 GOVERNMENT ACCESS TO WORK SITE

The Contractor shall provide a gas powered boat and a Boat Operator by which Government personnel may access the work site from the closest feasible public boat ramp. The Contractor's boat and Boat Operator shall be available to provide access to the work site, including the floating plant, at any time during the contract. The boat provided by the Contractor shall be capable of safely transporting a minimum of three Government personnel and the Contractor's Boat Operator at one time. The boat shall be reliable, in good repair, and have enough horse power to make efficient trips between the boat ramp and floating plant. The Government may coordinate trips between the floating plant and ramp with the Contractor so as to not negatively impact the Contractor's schedule or production.

1.5 EVALUATION OF CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE

The Contractor's performance will be evaluated in accordance with FAR Part 42.15 in the areas of quality, schedule, cost control, management, utilization of small businesses, and regulatory compliance at minimum. The evaluation will include a written narrative and rating of either exceptional, very good, satisfactory, marginal, or unsatisfactory for each. The format for the evaluation is attached at the end of Section 01 95 00 FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS.

The Contractor's review of the evaluation shall be completed electronically at the CPARS, http://www.cpars.gov. This website also includes guidance



and the user's manual.

Upon contract award, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer with the name and e-mail address of the Contractor's Representative to be registered into the system. Following initial completion by the Government, the Contractor will have sixty (60) calendar days to review, comment, and return the evaluation.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

The Contractor shall comply with the contract requirements stated in Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS. Contractor shall maintain all work within and outside the project boundaries free from environmental pollution that would be in violation of any federal, state, local regulations or permits.

1.7 COORDINATION CONFERENCES

Routine coordination conferences will be scheduled by the Contracting Officer throughout the life of this contract. Coordination conferences will be held to discuss contract administration, Contractor quality control, phasing, scheduling, and other aspects relating to this construction. The Corps of Engineers and the Contractor will be represented at each of these meetings. Coordination conferences will be scheduled to occur when notified by the Contracting Officer.

1.8 VETERANS EMPLOYMENT EMPHASIS FOR U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS CONTRACTS

In addition to complying with the requirements outlined in FAR Part 22.13, FAR Provision 52.222-38 COMPLIANCE WITH VETERAN'S EMPOLOYMENT REPORTING REQUIREMENTS, FAR Clause 52.222-35 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY FOR VETERANS, FAR Clause 52.222-37 EMPLOYMENT REPORTS ON VETERANS, DFARS 222.13 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY FOR VETERANS and Department of Labor regulations, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) contractors and subcontractors at all tiers are encouraged to promote the training and employment of U.S. veterans while performing under a USACE contract. While no set-aside, evaluation preference, or incentive applies to the solicitation or performance under the resultant contract, USACE contractors are encouraged to seek out highly qualified veterans to perform services under this contract. The following resources are available to assist USACE contractors in their outreach efforts:

a. U.S. Department of Labor Veterans employment: www.vets.gov/

b. Federal veteran employment information: www.fedshirevets.gov/index.aspx

c. Veterans’ Employment and Training Service (VETS): http://www.dol.gov/vets/

d. Veterans Opportunity to Work (VOW) Program: http://benefits.va.gov/vow/

e. U.S. Army Warrior Transition Command Employment Index: http://www.wct.army.mil/modules/employers/index.html

f. Hiring Our Heroes initiative: www.uschamberfoundation.org/hiring-our-heroes

g. Guide to Hiring Veterans: www.whitehouse.gov/sites/default/files/docs/white_house_business_council_



-_guide_to_hiring_veterans_0.pdf

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES

3.1.1 Contractor Responsibilities

a. The Contractor shall be responsible for the availability of utilities for use on the project. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the amount of each utility service consumed shall be charged to and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge.

b. The Contractor, at its expense and in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines, and all meters required to measure the amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges. Before final acceptance of the work by the Government, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated paraphernalia.

c. The Contractor is responsible for providing restroom and drinking water facilities for all personnel associated with this contract.

3.1.2 Alterations to Utilities

a. Where changes and relocations of utility lines are noted to be performed by others, the Contractor shall give the Contracting Officer at least thirty (30) days written notice in advance of the time that the change or relocation is required. In the event that, after the expiration of thirty (30) days after the receipt of such notice by the Contracting Officer, such utility lines have not been changed or relocated and delay is occasioned to the completion of the work under contract, the Contractor will be entitled to a time extension equal to the period of time lost by the Contractor after the expiration of said thirty (30) day period. Any modification to existing or relocated lines required as a result of the Contractor's method of operation shall be made wholly at the Contractor's expense and no additional time will be allowed for delays incurred by such modifications.

b. Separate payment will not be made for alterations or relocations of utilities.

3.1.3 Interruptions of Utilities

a. No utility services shall be interrupted by the Contractor to make connections, to relocate, or for any purpose without approval of the Contracting Officer.

b. Request for Permission to shut down services shall be submitted in writing to the Contracting Officer not less than seventeen (17) days prior to date of proposed interruption. The request shall give the following information:



(1) Nature of Utility (Gas, L.P. or H.P., Water, etc.) (2) Size of line and location of shutoff. (3) Buildings and services affected. (4) Hours and date of shutoff. (5) Estimated length of time services will be interrupted.

c. Services shall not be shutoff until receipt of approval of the

proposed hours and date from the Contracting Officer.

d. Shutoffs which will cause interruption of Government work operations as determined by the Contracting Officer shall be accomplished during regular non-work hours or on non-work days of the Using Agency.

e. Operation of valves on water mains will be by Government personnel. Where shutoff of water lines interrupts service to fire hydrants or fire sprinkler systems, the Contractor shall arrange his operations and have sufficient material and personnel available to complete the work without undue delay or to restore service without delay in event of emergency.

-- End of Section --





SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

08/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 Locations 1.1.2 Materials 1.1.3 Project Description 1.1.3.1 Wheeler Job TRM 303.5 & 303.6 (2 Cell Demo + 2 Cell

Assembled) 1.1.3.1.1 Demolition 1.1.3.1.2 Installation 1.2 SALVAGE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION




SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK08/15

PART 1 GENERAL

All quantities are approximate in nature.

1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1.1 Locations

The project is located near Wheeler Lock & Dam Tennessee River Mile (TRM) 303 near Decatur, Al in Morgan County. The exact location will be shown by the Contracting Officer. Contractor and Lock Master shall stay in contact to coordinate reservoir elevations.

Wheeler Lock Information:Address: 100 Highway 101 Rogersville, AL 35652-9348Lock Master: Donald DeanContact: (256) 247-3311

Guntersville Lock Information: Address: 3780 Guntersville Dam Rd. Grant, AL 35747Lock Master: Donald DeanContact: (256) 582-3263

1.1.2 Materials

Sheet piles, miscellaneous metals such as mooring and D rings, horizontal fenders and vertical sheet piles, and all other items necessary for construction shall be provided by the Contractor. Aggregate material from the existing mooring cells shall be re-used as aggregate fill for the new mooring cells. Additional aggregate shall be provided by the Contractor to fill the remaining volume of cells. The Contractor will be responsible for pick up and transporting all sheet piles specified without damage. No spreader bar or cellular sheet pile template will be provided and will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.1.3 Project Description

1.1.3.1 Wheeler Job TRM 303.5 & 303.6 (2 Cell Demo + 2 Cell Assembled)

1.1.3.1.1 Demolition

Two Mooring Cells near Wheeler Lock and Dam, specifically Tennessee River Mile (TRM) 303 shall be replaced. Project coordinates are detailed in drawing set. Demolition of the cell requires removal and storage of the aggregate, removal of miscellaneous metals, and sheet piles.

This is a unique project due to the nature of the work. The two cells originally had a diameter of 30'3" but once damaged, cells were enclosed in a larger diameter cell of 36'6". Their condition is unknown. All existing sheet piles shall be removed. The contractor shall not anticipate a concrete cap on existing cells. The removed aggregate will remain government property and must be salvaged as fill for the new replacement



cell. The new cell once completed shall contain an approximate aggregate quantity of 675 cubic yards. The cell currently has a maximum aggregate quantity of 1000 cubic yards of aggregate per cell. However, one cell has been severly damaged causing aggregate to escape the structure. The second cell shows no indication of aggregate loss above water level. The exact aggregate quantities are unknown. The contractor may combine aggregates from the two cells during project. The remaining aggregate necessary to fill the cell shall be provided by the Contractor.

All aggregates removed from the existing shells shall be re-used during construction of the new cells or become property of the contractor as determined by COR.

The removed sheet piles shall be the property of the Contractor. All mooring ring assemblies removed shall be property of the Contractor. All horizontal fenders shall be removed and be property of the Contractor.

1.1.3.1.2 Installation

The new cell diameter and height are indicated on the drawing set. The cell shall be placed in the footprint of the current cell. Approximately 10-20 feet of water and 10-20 feet of overburden until expected refusal. The number of NEW sheet piles is listed in the drawing set. A tremie concrete seal shall be developed prior to aggregate placement. Dimensions and elevations are indicated by the drawing set. Any excess sheet piles once the mooring cell has been fully constructed shall be property of the Contractor.

1.2 SALVAGE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

All aggregates shall be reused for the new replacement mooring cell.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.






SECTION 01 22 00

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

08/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SINGLE JOB PAYMENT ITEMS 1.1.1 Mobilization and Demobilization

1.1.1.1 Payment1.1.1.2 Unit of Measure

1.1.2 Performance and Payment Bonds1.1.2.1 Payment1.1.2.2

1.1.3 Unit of Measurement

Base - Removal of Existing Cell TRM 303.1.1.3.1 Payment1.1.3.2 Unit of Measure

1.1.4 Installation of Mooring Cell TRM 303.1.1.4.1 Payment1.1.4.2

1.1.5 Unit of Measure

Option 01 - Replacement of Existing Cell TRM 303.1.1.5.1 Payment1.1.5.2 Unit of Measure

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION




SECTION 01 22 00

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES08/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SINGLE JOB PAYMENT ITEMS

Payment items for the work of this contract for which contract job payments will be made are listed in the BIDDING SCHEDULE and described below. All costs for items of work, which are not specifically mentioned to be included in a particular job or unit price payment item, are included in the listed job item most closely associated with the work involved. The job price and payment made for each item listed constitutes full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment, and performing any associated Contractor quality control, environmental protection, meeting safety requirements, tests and reports, and for performing all work required for which separate payment is not otherwise provided.

1.1.1 Mobilization and Demobilization

1.1.1.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with mobilization and demobilization in accordance with Contract Clause 252.236-7004 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION. Payment will be made at the contract price per single job for Mobilization and Demobilization.

1.1.1.2 Unit of Measure

Unit of measure: job.

1.1.2 Performance and Payment Bonds

1.1.2.1 Payment

The Government will pay for premiums for Performance and Payment Bonds in accordance with Contract Clause 52.232-5 PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS. The premiums for performance and payment bonds shall be included in the contract single job price for "Performance and Payment Bonds". The payment made under this provision shall not exceed the amount included for "Performance and Payment Bonds", which payment shall take into consideration any discounts or rebates to the Contractor from the Surety. The Contractor is advised that the pay item "Performance and Payment Bonds" is only for the cost of bonds. Other costs should be allocated to the appropriate payment items.

1.1.2.2 Unit of Measurement

Unit of measurement: Job.



1.1.3 Base - Removal of Existing Cell TRM 303.

1.1.3.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with all operations necessary for removal of the mooring cell TRM 303. at Wheeler Resevoir. "Payment will be made at the contract price per single job for "Removal of Existing Cell TRM 303. ".


Unit of measure: Job.

1.1.4 Installation of Mooring Cell TRM 303.

1.1.4.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with operations necessary for the complete installation of the Mooring Cell TRM 303. . Payment will be made at the contract price per single job for "Installation of Mooring Cell TRM 303. ". This price includes full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor required to satisfactorily remove the existing mooring cell.



1.1.5 Option 01 - Replacement of Existing Cell TRM 303.

1.1.5.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with operations necessary for the complete removal and installation of the Mooring Cell TRM 303. . Payment will be made at the contract price per single job for "Replacement of Existing Cell TRM 303. ". This price includes full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor required to satisfactorily remove the existing mooring cell.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used






SECTION 01 32 01

PROJECT SCHEDULE

02/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULER QUALIFICATIONS 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S WORK SCHEDULE

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOFTWARE 2.1.1 Contractor Software

2.1.1.1 Primavera

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3.2 BASIS FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADING 3.2.1 Activity Cost Loading 3.2.2 Withholdings / Payment Rejection 3.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE DETAILED REQUIREMENTS 3.3.1 Level of Detail Required 3.3.2 Activity Durations 3.3.3 Procurement Activities 3.3.4 Mandatory Tasks 3.3.5 Government Activities 3.3.6 Contract Milestones and Constraints

3.3.6.1 Project Start Date Milestone3.3.6.2 End Project Finish Milestone3.3.6.3 Start Phase3.3.6.4 End Phase

3.3.7 Calendars 3.3.8 Open Ended Logic 3.3.9 Default Progress Data Disallowed 3.3.10 Out-of-Sequence Progress 3.3.11 Added and Deleted Activities 3.3.12 Original Durations 3.3.13 Leads, Lags, and Start to Finish Relationships 3.3.14 Retained Logic 3.3.15 Percent Complete 3.3.16 Remaining Duration 3.3.17 Cost Loading of Closeout Activities

3.3.17.1 As-Built Drawings 3.3.18 Anticipated Adverse Weather 3.3.19 Early Completion Schedule and the Right to Finish Early 3.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS 3.4.1 Preliminary Project Schedule Submission



3.4.2 Initial Project Schedule Submission 3.4.3 Periodic Schedule Updates 3.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS 3.5.1 Narrative Report 3.5.2 Schedule Reports

3.5.2.1 Activity Report3.5.2.2 Logic Report3.5.2.3 Total Float Report3.5.2.4 Earnings Report by CLIN

3.5.3 Network Diagram3.5.3.1 Continuous Flow3.5.3.2 Project Milestone Dates3.5.3.3 Critical Path3.5.3.4 Banding3.5.3.5 Cash Flow / Schedule Variance Control (SVC) Diagram

3.6 PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE 3.6.1 Periodic Schedule Update Meetings 3.6.2 Update Submission Following Progress Meeting 3.7 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS 3.8 REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONS 3.8.1 Justification of Delay 3.8.2 Time Impact Analysis (Prospective Analysis) 3.8.3 Forensic Schedule Analysis (Retrospective Analysis) 3.8.4 Fragmentary Network (Fragnet) 3.8.5 Time Extension 3.8.6 Impact to Early Completion Schedule 3.9 FAILURE TO ACHIEVE PROGRESS 3.9.1 Artificially Improving Progress 3.9.2 Failure to Perform 3.9.3 Recovery Schedule 3.10 OWNERSHIP OF FLOAT 3.11 PRIMAVERA P6 MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS




SECTION 01 32 01

PROJECT SCHEDULE02/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

AACE INTERNATIONAL (AACE)

AACE 29R-03 (2011) Forensic Schedule Analysis

AACE 52R-06 (2006) Time Impact Analysis - As Applied in Construction

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Project Scheduler Qualifications; GPreliminary Project Schedule; GInitial Project Schedule; GPeriodic Schedule Update; G

1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULER QUALIFICATIONS

Designate an authorized representative to be responsible for the preparation of the schedule and all required updating and production of reports. The authorized representative must have a minimum of 2-years experience scheduling construction projects similar in size and nature to this project with scheduling software that meets the requirements of this specification. Representative must have a comprehensive knowledge of CPM scheduling principles and application.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S WORK SCHEDULE

The Contractor shall perform all on-site work Monday through Friday only and between the hours of 0630 and 1700. Should the Contractor desire to perform on-site work outside of these hours, the Contractor shall submit a request to the Contracting Officer detailing the requested work schedule. Only after written approval from the Contracting Officer of such a request will the Contractor be allowed to work outside of the aforementioned hours.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOFTWARE

The scheduling software utilized to produce and update the schedules required herein must be capable of meeting all requirements of this specification.

2.1.1 Contractor Software

Scheduling software used by the contractor must be capable of meeting all requirements of this specification.

2.1.1.1 Primavera

If Primavera P6 is selected for use, provide the "xer" export file in a version of P6 importable by the Government system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Prepare for approval a Project Schedule, as specified herein, pursuant to FAR Clause 52.236-15, SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS. Show in the schedule the proposed sequence to perform the work and dates contemplated for starting and completing all schedule activities. The scheduling of the entire project is required. The scheduling of construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor management personnel must actively participate in its development. Subcontractors and suppliers working on the project must also contribute in developing and maintaining an accurate Project Schedule. Provide a schedule that is a forward planning as well as a project monitoring tool. Use the Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation to generate all Project Schedules. Prepare each Project Schedule using the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM).

3.2 BASIS FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADING

The schedule is the basis for determining contract earnings during each update period and therefore the amount of each progress payment. The aggregate value of all activities coded to a contract CLIN must equal the value of the CLIN.

3.2.1 Activity Cost Loading

Activity cost loading must be reasonable and without front-end loading. Provide additional documentation to demonstrate reasonableness if requested by the Contracting Officer.

3.2.2 Withholdings / Payment Rejection

Failure to meet the requirements of this specification may result in the disapproval of the preliminary, initial or periodic schedule updates and subsequent rejection of payment requests until compliance is met.

In the event that the Contracting Officer directs schedule revisions and those revisions have not been included in subsequent Project Schedule revisions or updates, the Contracting Officer may withhold 10 percent of pay request amount from each payment period until such revisions to the project schedule have been made.



3.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE DETAILED REQUIREMENTS

3.3.1 Level of Detail Required

Develop the Project Schedule to the appropriate level of detail to address major milestones and to allow for satisfactory project planning and execution. Failure to develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail will result in its disapproval. The Contracting Officer will consider, but is not limited to, the following characteristics and requirements to determine appropriate level of detail:

3.3.2 Activity Durations

Reasonable activity durations are those that allow the progressof ongoing activities to be accurately determined between update periods. Less than 2 percent of all non-procurement activities may have Original Durations (OD) greater than 20 work days or 30 calendar days.

3.3.3 Procurement Activities

Include activities associated with the critical submittals and their approvals, procurement, fabrication, and delivery of long lead materials, equipment, fabricated assemblies, and supplies. Long lead procurement activities are those with an anticipated procurement sequence of over 90 calendar days.

3.3.4 Mandatory Tasks

Include the following activities/tasks in the initial project schedule and all updates.

a. Submission, review and acceptance of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals (individual activity for each).

b. Submission, review and acceptance of features require design completion

c. Long procurement activities

d. Submission and approval of as-built drawings.

e. Contractor's pre-final inspection.

f. Correction of punch list from Contractor's pre-final inspection.

g. Government's pre-final inspection.

h. Correction of punch list from Government's pre-final inspection.

i. Final inspection.

3.3.5 Government Activities

Show Government and other agency activities that could impact progress. These activities include, but are not limited to: approvals, environmental permit approvals by State regulators, inspections, utility tie-in, Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) and Notice to Proceed (NTP) for phasing requirements.



3.3.6 Contract Milestones and Constraints

Milestone activities are to be used for significant project events including, but not limited to, project phasing, project start and end activities, or interim completion dates. The use of artificial float constraints such as "zero free float" or "zero total float" are prohibited.

3.3.6.1 Project Start Date Milestone

The first activity in the project schedule must be a start milestone titled "NTP Acknowledged,"

3.3.6.2 End Project Finish Milestone

The last activity in the schedule must be a finish milestone titled "End Project."

Constrain the project schedule to the Contract Completion Date in such a way that if the schedule calculates an early finish, then the float calculation for "End Project" milestone reflects positive float on the longest path. If the project schedule calculates a late finish, then the "End Project" milestone float calculation reflects negative float on the longest path. The Government is under no obligation to accelerate Government activities to support a Contractor's early completion.

3.3.6.3 Start Phase

Use a start milestone as the first activity for a project phase. Call the start milestone "Start Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work.

3.3.6.4 End Phase

Use a finish milestone as the last activity for a project phase. Call the finish milestone "End Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work.

3.3.7 Calendars

Schedule activities on a Calendar to which the activity logically belongs. Develop calendars to accommodate any contract defined work period such as a 7-day calendar for Government Acceptance activities, concrete cure times, etc. Develop the default Calendar to match the physical work plan with non-work periods identified including weekends and holidays. Develop sSeasonal Calendar(s) and assign to seasonally affected activities as applicable.

If an activity is weather sensitive it should be assigned to a calendar showing non-work days on a monthly basis, with the non-work days selected at random across the weeks of the calendar, using the anticipated days provided in the contract clause TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER. Assign non-work days over a seven-day week as weather records are compiled on seven-day weeks, which may cause some of the weather related non-work days to fall on weekends.

3.3.8 Open Ended Logic

Only two open ended activities are allowed: the first activity "NTP Acknowledged" may have no predecessor logic, and the last activity -"End Project" may have no successor logic.



Predecessor open ended logic may be allowed in a time impact analyses upon the Contracting Officer's approval.

3.3.9 Default Progress Data Disallowed

Actual Start and Finish dates must not automatically update with default mechanisms included in the scheduling software. Updating of the percent complete and the remaining duration of any activity must be independent functions. Disable program features that calculate one of these parameters from the other. Activity Actual Start (AS) and Actual Finish (AF) dates assigned during the updating process must match those dates provided in the Contractor Quality Control Reports. Failure to document the AS and AF dates in the Daily Quality Control report will result in disapproval of the Contractor's schedule.

3.3.10 Out-of-Sequence Progress

Activities that have progressed before all preceding logic has been satisfied (Out-of-Sequence Progress) will be allowed only on a case-by-case basis subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Propose logic corrections to eliminate out of sequence progress or justify not changing the sequencing for approval prior to submitting an updated project schedule. Address out of sequence progress or logic changes in the Narrative Report and in the periodic schedule update meetings.

3.3.11 Added and Deleted Activities

Do not delete activities from the project schedule or add new activities to the schedule without approval from the Contracting Officer. Activity ID and description changes are considered new activities and cannot be changed without Contracting Officer approval.

3.3.12 Original Durations

Activity Original Durations (OD) must be reasonable to perform the work item. OD changes are prohibited unless justification is providedand approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.3.13 Leads, Lags, and Start to Finish Relationships

Lags must be reasonable as determined by the Government and not used in place of realistic original durations, must not be in place to artificially absorb float, or to replace proper schedule logic.

a. Leads (negative lags) are prohibited.

b. Start to Finish (SF) relationships are prohibited.

3.3.14 Retained Logic

Schedule calculations must retain the logic between predecessors and successors ("retained logic" mode) even when the successor activity(s) starts and the predecessor activity(s) has not finished (out-of-sequence progress). Software features that in effect sever the tie between predecessor and successor activities when the successor has started and the predecessor logic is not satisfied ("progress override") are not be allowed.



3.3.15 Percent Complete

Update the percent complete for each activity started, based on the realistic assessment of earned value. Activities which are complete but for remaining minor punch list work and which do not restrain the initiation of successor activities may be declared 100 percent complete to allow for proper schedule management.

3.3.16 Remaining Duration

Update the remaining duration for each activity based on the number of estimated work days it will take to complete the activity. Remaining duration may not mathematically correlate with percentage found under paragraph entitled Percent Complete.

3.3.17 Cost Loading of Closeout Activities

Cost load the "Correction of punch list from Government pre-final inspection" activity(ies) not less than 1 percent of the present contract value. Activity(ies) may be declared 100 percent complete upon the Government's verification of completion and correction of all punch list work identified during Government pre-final inspection(s).

3.3.17.1 As-Built Drawings

If there is no separate contract line item (CLIN) for as-built drawings, cost load the "Submission and approval of as-built drawings" activity not less than $35,000 or 1 percent of the present contract value, which ever is greater, up to $200,000. Activity will be declared 100 percent complete upon the Government's approval.

3.3.18 Anticipated Adverse Weather

Paragraph applicable to contracts with clause entitled TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER. Reflect the number of anticipated adverse weather delays allocated to a weather sensitive activity in the activity's calendar.

3.3.19 Early Completion Schedule and the Right to Finish Early

An Early Completion Schedule is an Initial Project Schedule (IPS) that indicates all scope of the required contract work will be completed before the contractually required completion date.

a. No IPS indicating an Early Completion will be accepted without being fully resource-loaded (including crew sizes and manhours) and the Government agreeing that the schedule is reasonable and achievable.

b. The Government is under no obligation to accelerate work items it is responsible for to ensure that the early completion is met nor is it responsible to modify incremental funding (if applicable) for the project to meet the contractor's accelerated work.

3.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS

Provide the submissions as described below. The data CD/DVD, reports, and network diagrams required for each submission are contained in paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS. If the Contractor fails or refuses to furnish the information and schedule updates as set forth herein, then the Contractor



will be deemed not to have provided an estimate upon which a progress payment can be made.

Review comments made by the Government on the schedule(s) do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

3.4.1 Preliminary Project Schedule Submission

Within 15 calendar days after contract award submit the Preliminary Project Schedule defining the planned operations detailed for the first 90 calendar days for approval. The approved Preliminary Project Schedule will be used for payment purposes not to exceed 90 calendar days after NTP. Completely cost load the Preliminary Project Schedule to balance the contract award CLINS shown on the Price Schedule. The Preliminary Project Schedule may be summary in nature for the remaining performance period. It must be early start and late finish constrained and logically tied as specified. The Preliminary Project Schedule forms the basis for the Initial Project Schedule specified herein and must include all of the required plan and program preparations, submissions and approvals identified in the contract (for example, Quality Control Plan, Safety Plan, and Environmental Protection Plan) as well as design activities, planned submissions of all early design packages, permitting activities, design review conference activities, and other non-construction activities intended to occur within the first 90 calendar days. Government acceptance of the associated design package(s) and all other specified Program and Plan approvals must occur prior to any planned construction activities. Activity code any activities that are summary in nature after the first 90 calendar days with Bid Item (CLIN) code (BIDI), Responsibility Code (RESP) and Feature of Work code (FOW).

3.4.2 Initial Project Schedule Submission

Submit the Initial Project Schedule for approval within 42 calendar days after notice to proceed is issued. The schedule must demonstrate a reasonable and realistic sequence of activities which represent all work through the entire contract performance period. No payment will be made for work items not fully detailed in the Project Schedule.

3.4.3 Periodic Schedule Updates

Update the Project Schedule on a regular basis, monthly at a minimum. Provide a draft Periodic Schedule Update for review at the schedule update meetings as prescribed in the paragraph PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS. These updates will enable the Government to assess Contractor's progress.

a. Update information including Actual Start Dates (AS), Actual Finish Dates (AF), Remaining Durations (RD), and Percent Complete is subject to the approval of the Government at the meeting.

b. AS and AF dates must match the date(s) reported on the Contractor's Quality Control Report for an activity start or finish.

3.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

Submit the following items for the Preliminary Schedule, Initial Schedule, and every Periodic Schedule Update throughout the life of the project:



3.5.1 Narrative Report

Provide a Narrative Report with each schedule submission. The Narrative Report is expected to communicate to the Government the thorough analysis of the schedule output and the plans to compensate for any problems, either current or potential, which are revealed through that analysis. Include the following information as minimum in the Narrative Report:

a. Identify and discuss the work scheduled to start in the next update period.

b. A description of activities along the two most critical paths where the total float is less than or equal to 20 work days.

c. A description of current and anticipated problem areas or delaying factors and their impact and an explanation of corrective actions taken or required to be taken.

d. Identify and explain why activities based on their calculated late dates should have either started or finished during the update period but did not.

e. Identify and discuss all schedule changes by activity ID and activity name including what specifically was changed and why the change was needed. Include at a minimum new and deleted activities, logic changes, duration changes, calendar changes, lag changes, resource changes, and actual start and finish date changes.

f. Identify and discuss out-of-sequence work.

3.5.2 Schedule Reports

The format, filtering, organizing and sorting for each schedule report will be as directed by the Contracting Officer. Typically, reports contain Activity Numbers, Activity Description, Original Duration, Remaining Duration, Early Start Date, Early Finish Date, Late Start Date, Late Finish Date, Total Float, Actual Start Date, Actual Finish Date, and Percent Complete. Provide the reports electronically in .pdf format. Provide two sets of hardcopy reports. The following lists typical reports that will be requested:

3.5.2.1 Activity Report

List of all activities sorted according to activity number.

3.5.2.2 Logic Report

List of detailed predecessor and successor activities for every activity in ascending order by activity number.

3.5.2.3 Total Float Report

A list of all incomplete activities sorted in ascending order of total float. List activities which have the same amount of total float in ascending order of Early Start Dates. Do not show completed activities on this report.



3.5.2.4 Earnings Report by CLIN

A compilation of the Total Earnings on the project from the NTP to the data date, which reflects the earnings of activities based on the agreements made in the schedule update meeting defined herein. Provided a complete schedule update has been furnished, this report serves as the basis of determining progress payments. Group activities by CLIN number and sort by activity number. Provide a total CLIN percent earned value, CLIN percent complete, and project percent complete. The printed report must contain the following for each activity: the Activity Number, Activity Description, Original Budgeted Amount, Earnings to Date, Earnings this period, Total Quantity, Quantity to Date, and Percent Complete (based on cost).

3.5.3 Network Diagram

The Network Diagram is required for the Preliminary, Initial and Periodic Updates. Depict and display the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited to, the following conditions to review compliance with this paragraph:

3.5.3.1 Continuous Flow

Show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows from right to left. Show the activity number, description, duration, and estimated earned value on the diagram.

3.5.3.2 Project Milestone Dates

Show dates on the diagram for start of project, any contract required interim completion dates, and contract completion dates.

3.5.3.3 Critical Path

Show all activities on the critical path. The critical path is defined as the longest path.

3.5.3.4 Banding

Organize activities using the WBS or as otherwise directed to assist in the understanding of the activity sequence. Typically, this flow will group activities by major elements of work, category of work, work area and/or responsibility.

3.5.3.5 Cash Flow / Schedule Variance Control (SVC) Diagram

With each schedule submission, provide a SVC diagram showing 1) Cash Flow S-Curves indicating planned project cost based on projected early and late activity finish dates, and 2) Earned Value to-date.

3.6 PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE

3.6.1 Periodic Schedule Update Meetings

Conduct periodic schedule update meetings for the purpose of reviewing the proposed Periodic Schedule Update, Narrative Report, Schedule Reports, and progress payment. Conduct meetings at least monthly within five days of the proposed schedule data date. Provide a computer with the scheduling software loaded and a projector which allows all meeting participants to



view the proposed schedule during the meeting. The Contractor's authorized scheduler must organize, group, sort, filter, perform schedule revisions as needed and review functions as requested by the Contractor and/or Government. The meeting is a working interactive exchange which allows the Government and Contractor the opportunity to review the updated schedule on a real time and interactive basis. The meeting will last no longer than 8 hours. Provide a draft of the proposed narrative report and schedule data file to the Government a minimum of two workdays in advance of the meeting. The Contractor's Project Manager and scheduler must attend the meeting with the authorized representative of the Contracting Officer. Superintendents, foremen and major subcontractors must attend the meeting as required to discuss the project schedule and work. Following the periodic schedule update meeting, make corrections to the draft submission. Include only those changes approved by the Government in the submission and invoice for payment.

3.6.2 Update Submission Following Progress Meeting

Submit the complete Periodic Schedule Update of the Project Schedule containing all approved progress, revisions, and adjustments, pursuant to paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS not later than 4 work days after the periodic schedule update meeting.

3.7 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS

Conduct a weekly meeting with the Government (or as otherwise mutually agreed to) between the meetings described in paragraph entitled PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS for the purpose of jointly reviewing the actual progress of the project as compared to the as planned progress and to review planned activities for the upcoming two weeks. Use the current approved schedule update for the purposes of this meeting and for the production and review of reports. At the weekly progress meeting, address the status of RFIs, RFPs and Submittals.

3.8 REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONS

Provide a justification of delay to the Contracting Officer in accordance with the contract provisions and clauses for approval within 10 days of a delay occurring. Also prepare a time impact analysis for each Government request for proposal (RFP) to justify time extensions.

3.8.1 Justification of Delay

Provide a description of the event(s) that caused the delay and/or impact to the work. As part of the description, identify all schedule activities impacted. Show that the event that caused the delay/impact was the responsibility of the Government. Provide a time impact analysis that demonstrates the effects of the delay or impact on the project completion date or interim completion date(s). Evaluate multiple impacts chronologically; each with its own justification of delay. With multiple impacts consider any concurrency of delay. A time extension and the schedule fragnet becomes part of the project schedule and all future schedule updates upon approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.8.2 Time Impact Analysis (Prospective Analysis)

Prepare a time impact analysis for approval by the Contracting Officer based on industry standard AACE 52R-06. Utilize a copy of the last approved schedule prior to the first day of the impact or delay for the



time impact analysis. If Contracting Officer determines the time frame between the last approved schedule and the first day of impact is too great, prepare an interim updated schedule to perform the time impact analysis. Unless approved by the Contracting Officer, no other changes may be incorporated into the schedule being used to justify the time impact.

3.8.3 Forensic Schedule Analysis (Retrospective Analysis)

Prepare an analysis for approval by the Contracting Officer based on industry standard AACE 29R-03.

3.8.4 Fragmentary Network (Fragnet)

Prepare a proposed fragnet for time impact analysis consisting of a sequence of new activities that are proposed to be added to the project schedule to demonstrate the influence of the delay or impact to the project's contractual dates. Clearly show how the proposed fragnet is to be tied into the project schedule including all predecessors and successors to the fragnet activities. The proposed fragnet must be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to incorporation into the project schedule.

3.8.5 Time Extension

The Contracting Officer must approve the Justification of Delay including the time impact analysis before a time extension will be granted. No time extension will be granted unless the delay consumes all available Project Float and extends the projected finish date ("End Project" milestone) beyond the Contract Completion Date. The time extension will be in calendar days.

Actual delays that are found to be caused by the Contractor's own actions, which result in a calculated schedule delay will not be a cause for an extension to the performance period, completion date, or any interim milestone date.

3.8.6 Impact to Early Completion Schedule

No extended overhead will be paid for delay prior to the original Contract Completion Date for an Early Completion IPS unless the Contractor actually performed work in accordance with that Early Completion Schedule. The Contractor must show that an early completion was achievable had it not been for the impact.

3.9 FAILURE TO ACHIEVE PROGRESS

Should the progress fall behind the approved project schedule for reasons other than those that are excusable within the terms of the contract, the Contracting Officer may require provision of a written recovery plan for approval. The plan must detail how progress will be made-up to include which activities will be accelerated by adding additional crews, longer work hours, extra work days, etc.

3.9.1 Artificially Improving Progress

Artificially improving progress by means such as, but not limited to, revising the schedule logic, modifying or adding constraints, shortening activity durations, or changing calendars in the project schedule is prohibited. Indicate assumptions made and the basis for any logic, constraint, duration and calendar changes used in the creation of the



recovery plan. Any additional resources, manpower, or daily and weekly work hour changes proposed in the recovery plan must be evident at the work site and documented in the daily report along with the Schedule Narrative Report.

3.9.2 Failure to Perform

Failure to perform work and maintain progress in accordance with the supplemental recovery plan may result in an interim and final unsatisfactory performance rating and/or may result in corrective action directed by the Contracting Officer pursuant to FAR 52.236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts, FAR 52.249-10 Default (Fixed-Price Construction), and other contract provisions.

3.9.3 Recovery Schedule

Should the Contracting Officer find it necessary, submit a recovery schedule pursuant to FAR 52.236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts.

3.10 OWNERSHIP OF FLOAT

Except for the provision given in the paragraph IMPACT TO EARLY COMPLETION SCHEDULE, float available in the schedule, at any time, may not be considered for the exclusive use of either the Government or the Contractor including activity and/or project float. Activity float is the number of work days that an activity can be delayed without causing a delay to the "End Project" finish milestone. Project float (if applicable) is the number of work days between the projected early finish and the contract completion date milestone.

3.11 PRIMAVERA P6 MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS

If Primavera P6 is being used, request a backup file template (.xer) from the Government, if one is available, prior to building the schedule. The following settings are mandatory and required in all schedule submissions to the Government:

a. Activity Codes must be Project Level, not Global or EPS level.

b. Calendars must be Project Level, not Global or Resource level.

c. Activity Duration Types must be set to "Fixed Duration & Units".

d. Percent Complete Types must be set to "Physical".

e. Time Period Admin Preferences must remain the default "8.0 hr/day, 40 hr/week, 172 hr/month, 2000 hr/year". Set Calendar Work Hours/Day to 8.0 Hour days.

f. Set Schedule Option for defining Critical Activities to "Longest Path".

g. Set Schedule Option for defining progressed activities to "Retained Logic".

h. Set up cost loading using a single lump sum labor resource. The Price/Unit must be $1/hr, Default Units/Time must be "8h/d", and settings "Auto Compute Actuals" and "Calculate costs from units" selected.



i. Activity ID's must not exceed 10 characters.

j. Activity Names must have the most defining and detailed description within the first 30 characters.






SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

05/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD) 1.2.2 Approving Authority 1.2.3 Work 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION 1.4.1 Designer of Record Approved (DA) 1.4.2 Government Approved (G) 1.4.3 For Information Only 1.5 PREPARATION 1.5.1 Transmittal Form 1.5.2 Source Drawings for Shop Drawings 1.5.2.1 Terms and Conditions 1.5.3 Electronic File Format 1.6 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS 1.6.1 Number of Samples SD-04 Samples 1.7 INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS 1.8 SUBMITTAL REGISTER 1.8.1 Use of Submittal Register 1.8.2 Contractor Use of Submittal Register 1.8.3 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register 1.8.4 Copies Delivered to the Government 1.9 VARIATIONS 1.9.1 Considering Variations 1.9.2 Proposing Variations 1.9.3 Warranting that Variations are Compatible 1.9.4 Environmental Assessment of Variations 1.9.5 Review Schedule Extension 1.10 SCHEDULING 1.11 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY 1.11.1 Review Notations 1.12 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS 1.13 APPROVED SUBMITTALS 1.14 APPROVED SAMPLES 1.15 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT 1.16 STAMPS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION






SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES05/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

The Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in the respective sections.

Units of weights and measures used on all submittals are to be the same as those used in the contract drawings.

Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with contract requirements.

Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) System Manager to check and approve all items prior to submittal and stamp, sign, and date indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements are to be clearly identified. Include within submittals items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings; descriptive literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or curves; test reports; test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals (including parts list); certifications; warranties; and other such required submittals.

Submittals requiring Government approval are to be scheduled and made prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby. Pick up and dispose of samples not incorporated into the work in accordance with manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations.

A submittal register showing items of equipment and materials for when submittals are required by the specifications is provided in Section 01 95 00 FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD)

Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections. Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles as follows:


Submittals which are required prior to or the start of the next major phase of the construction on a multi-phase contract, includes schedules, tabular list of data, or tabular list including location, features, or other pertinent information regarding products, materials, equipment, or components to be used in the work.

Certificates of insurance



Surety bonds

List of proposed Subcontractors

List of proposed products

Construction progress schedule

Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)

Submittal register

Schedule of prices or Earned Value Report

Health and safety plan

Work plan

Quality Control(QC) plan

Environmental protection plan

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work.

Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the product or system into the project.

Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.

SD-03 Product Data

Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some portion of the work.

Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product warranties.

SD-04 Samples

Fabricated or unfabricated physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be judged.

Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for the project.

Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which the ensuring work can be judged. Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work.



SD-05 Design Data

Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work.

SD-06 Test Reports

Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or system identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements. Unless specified in another section, testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for the project.

Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site.

Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after installation.

Investigation reports.

Daily logs and checklists.

Final acceptance test and operational test procedure.

SD-07 Certificates

Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that the product, system, or material meets specification requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project.

Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier, installer or Subcontractor through Contractor. The document purpose is to further promote the orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods, or personnel qualifications.

Confined space entry permits.

Text of posted operating instructions.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.

Submittals required for Guiding Principle Validation (GPV) or Third Party Certification (TPC).

Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also, submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase of construction on a multi-phase contract.



1.2.2 Approving Authority

Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal.

1.2.3 Work

As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, except those SD-01 Pre-Construction Submittals noted above, construction, materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with this section.


Submittal Register; G

1.4 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION

Submittals are classified as follows:

1.4.1 Designer of Record Approved (DA)

Designer of Record (DOR) approval is required for extensions of design, critical materials, any deviations from the solicitation, the accepted proposal, or the completed design, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer. Within the terms of the Contract Clause SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION, they are considered to be "shop drawings." Contractor to provide the Government with the number of copies designated hereinafter of all DOR approved submittals. The Government may review any or all Designer of Record approved submittals for conformance to the Solicitation, Accepted Proposal and the completed design. The Government will review all submittals designated as deviating from the Solicitation or Accepted Proposal, as described below. Generally, design submittals should be identified as SD-05 Design Data submittals.

1.4.2 Government Approved (G)

Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer. Within the terms of the Contract Clause SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION, they are considered to be "shop drawings."

1.4.3 For Information Only

Submittals not requiring Government approval will be for information only.They are not considered to be "shop drawings" within the terms of the Contract Clause referred to above.



1.5 PREPARATION

1.5.1 Transmittal Form

Use the sample transmittal form ENG Form 4025-R, provided in Section 01 95 00 FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS, for submitting both Government approved and information only submittals in accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. These forms are included in the RMS CM software that the Contractor is required to use for this contract. Properly complete this form by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying each item submitted. Exercise special care to ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and sheet number of the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.

1.5.2 Source Drawings for Shop Drawings

The entire set of Source Drawing files (DWG) will not be provided to the Contractor. Only those requested by the Contractor to prepare shop drawings may be provided. Request the specific Drawing Number only for the preparation of Shop Drawings. These drawings may only be provided after award.

1.5.2.1 Terms and Conditions

Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the Government. The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor must, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use of these electronic files.

These electronic Source Drawing files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between the Source Drawing files and the corresponding construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic Source Drawing files, nor does it make representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractor hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the furnished Source Drawing files, the signed and sealed construction documents govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict exists. Use of these Source Drawing files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or modifies these electronic Source Drawing files for use in producing construction data related to this contract, remove all previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and dates).

1.5.3 Electronic File Format

Provide submittals in electronic format, with the exception of material samples required for SD-04 Samples items. IIn addition to the electronic



submittal, provide 2 hard copies of the submittals. Compile the submittal file as a single, complete document, to include the Transmittal Form described within. Name the electronic submittal file specifically according to its contents, coordinate the file naming convention with the Contracting Officer. Electronic files must be of sufficient quality that all information is legible. Use PDF as the electronic format, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Contracting Officer. Generate PDF files from original documents with bookmarks so that the text included in the PDF file is both searchable and can be copied. If documents are scanned, Optical Character Resolution (OCR) routines are required. Index and bookmark files exceeding 30 pages to allow efficient navigation of the file. When required, the electronic file must include a valid electronic signature, or scan of a signature.

Email electronic submittal documents fewer than 10MB to an email address as directed by the Contracting Officer. Provide electronic documents over 10MB on an optical disc, or through an electronic file sharing system such as the AMRDEC SAFE Web Application located at the following website: https://safe.amrdec.army.mil/safe/.

Provide hard copies of submittals when requested by the Contracting Officer. Up to 1dditional hard copy of any submittal may be requested at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, at no additional cost to the Government.

1.6 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS

1.6.1 Number of Samples SD-04 Samples

a. Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing range of variation, of each required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by approving authority and one will be returned to Contractor.

b. Submit one sample panel or provide one sample installation where directed. Include components listed in technical section or as directed.

c. Submit one sample installation, where directed.

d. Submit one sample of non-solid materials.

1.7 INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS

Normally submittals for information only will not be returned. Approval of the Contracting Officer is not required on information only submittals. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to resubmit any item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work; and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the Government in those instances where the technical specifications so prescribe.

1.8 SUBMITTAL REGISTER

Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Do not change data which is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered



by Government; retain data which is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and (i) as approved. A submittal register showing items of equipment and materials for which submittals are required by the specifications is provided as an attachment. This list may not be all inclusive and additional submittals may be required. Maintain a submittal register for the project in accordance with Section 01 45 00.15 RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONTRACTOR MODE (RMS CM)). The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format with the following fields completed, to the extent that will be required by the Government during subsequent usage.

Column (c): Lists specification section in which submittal is required.

Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type, e.g. SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.

Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification section where a material or product is specified. This listing is only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements.

Thereafter, the Contractor is to track all submittals by maintaining a complete list, including completion of all data columns, including dates on which submittals are received and returned by the Government.

1.8.1 Use of Submittal Register

Submit submittal register. Submit with QC plan and project schedule. Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:

Column (a) Activity Number: Activity number from the project schedule.

Column (g) Contractor Submit Date: Scheduled date for approving authority to receive submittals.

Column (h) Contractor Approval Date: Date Contractor needs approval of submittal.

Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs material delivered to Contractor control.

1.8.2 Contractor Use of Submittal Register

Update the following fields in the Government-furnished submittal register program or equivalent fields in program utilized by Contractor with each submittal throughout contract.

Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of consecutive numbers.

Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.

Column (l) List date of submittal transmission.



Column (q) List date approval received.

1.8.3 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register

Update the following fields in the Government-furnished submittal register program or equivalent fields in program utilized by Contractor.

Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of consecutive numbers.

Column (l) List date of submittal receipt.

Column (m) through (p) List Date related to review actions.

Column (q) List date returned to Contractor.

1.8.4 Copies Delivered to the Government

Deliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government with each invoice request.

1.9 VARIATIONS

Variations from contract requirements require both Designer of Record (DOR) and Government approval pursuant to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION and will be considered where advantageous to Government.

1.9.1 Considering Variations

Discussion with Contracting Officer prior to submission, after consulting with the DOR, will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and re-submittals. When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost, consider submission of the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP).

Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal letters. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the Government.

1.9.2 Proposing Variations

When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Contracting Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government, including the DOR's written analysis and approval. If lower cost is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation required for variation, include the submittals required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.

Check the column "variation" of ENG Form 4025 for submittals which include proposed deviations requested by the Contractor. Set forth in writing the reason for any deviations and annotate such deviations on the submittal. The Government reserves the right to rescind inadvertent approval of submittals containing unnoted deviations.



1.9.3 Warranting that Variations are Compatible

When delivering a variation for approval, Contractor, including its Designer(s) of Record, warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with other elements of work.

1.9.4 Environmental Assessment of Variations

Any variations requested by the Contractor, which may have an environmental impact, shall meet the requirements of Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will have an adverse environmental impact.

1.9.5 Review Schedule Extension

In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with variations.

1.10 SCHEDULING

Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications to be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.

a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of requirements.

b. Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on the register. If a submittal is called for but does not pertain to the contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal in the register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation. Approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of supplying submittals required by the contract documents but which have been omitted from the register or marked "N/A."

c. Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with actual submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have been fully approved, no further re-submittal is required.

d. Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each individual submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register."

e. Except as specified otherwise, allow for a review period of at least 30 calendar days for submittals for Contracting Officer approval. Period of review for submittals with Contracting Officer approval begins when Government receives submittal from QC organization.

f. Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal.



1.11 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY

When approving authority is Contracting Officer, the Government will:

a. Note date on which submittal was received.

b. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents.

c. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph REVIEW NOTATIONS and with markings appropriate for action indicated.

Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval, stamp and date submittals. 2 copies of the submittal will be retained by the Contracting Officer and 2 copies of the submittal will be returned to the Contractor. If the Government performs a conformance review of other Designer of Record approved submittals, the submittals will be so identified and returned, as described above.

1.11.1 Review Notations

Contracting Officer review will be completed within 30 calendar days after date of submission. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor with the following notations:

a. Submittals marked "approved" or "accepted" authorize the Contractor to proceed with the work covered.

b. Submittals marked "approved as noted" or "approved, except as noted, resubmittal not required," authorize the Contractor to proceed with the work covered provided he takes no exception to the corrections.

c. Submittals marked "not approved" or "disapproved," or "revise and resubmit," indicate noncompliance with the contract requirements or design concept, or that submittal is incomplete. Resubmit with appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until resubmittal is approved.

d. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been previously reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor, or is not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals returned for lack of review by Contractor or for being incomplete, with appropriate action, coordination, or change.

1.12 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS

Make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or specifications; notice as required under the FAR clause entitled CHANGES, is to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.



If changes are necessary to submittals, make such revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.

1.13 APPROVED SUBMITTALS

The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not to be construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory.

Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details, and the satisfactory construction of all work.

After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Contracting Officer, no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.

1.14 APPROVED SAMPLES

Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract requirements. Before submitting samples, the Contractor to assure that the materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has been approved.

Match the approved samples for materials and equipment incorporated in the work. If requested, approved samples, including those which may be damaged in testing, will be returned to the Contractor, at his expense, upon completion of the contract. Samples not approved will also be returned to the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.

Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests will be sufficient cause for refusal to consider, under this contract, any further samples of the same brand or make of that material. Government reserves the right to disapprove any material or equipment which previously has proved unsatisfactory in service.

Samples of various materials or equipment delivered on the site or in place may be taken by the Contracting Officer for testing. Samples failing to meet contract requirements will automatically void previous approvals. Contractor to replace such materials or equipment to meet contract requirements.

Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.

1.15 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT

Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required approvals have not been obtained.



1.16 STAMPS

Stamps used by the Contractor on the submittal data to certify that the submittal meets contract requirements is to be similar to the following:

________________________________________________________________________ | CONTRACTOR | | | | (Firm Name) | | | | | | | | _____ Approved | | | | | | _____ Approved with corrections as noted on submittal data and/or | | attached sheets(s) | | | | | | | | SIGNATURE: __________________________________________________________ | | | | TITLE: ______________________________________________________________ | | | | DATE: _______________________________________________________________ | | | |________________________________________________________________________|

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used






SECTION 01 35 26

GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

11/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 Competent Person (CP) 1.2.2 Competent Person, Confined Space 1.2.3 Competent Person, Cranes and Rigging 1.2.4 Competent Person, Excavation/Trenching 1.2.5 Competent Person, Fall Protection 1.2.6 Competent Person, Scaffolding 1.2.7 Competent Person (CP) Trainer 1.2.8 High Risk Activities 1.2.9 High Visibility Accident 1.2.10 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) 1.2.11 Medical Treatment 1.2.12 Near Miss 1.2.13 Operating Envelope 1.2.14 Qualified Person (QP) 1.2.15 Qualified Person, Fall Protection (QP for FP) 1.2.16 Recordable Injuries or Illnesses 1.2.17 USACE Property and Equipment 1.2.18 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) Accident or Load Handling

Equipment Mishap 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 MONTHLY EXPOSURE REPORTS 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.6 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES, AND MEETINGS 1.6.1 Personnel Qualifications 1.6.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) 1.6.1.2 Contractor Quality Control (QC) Manager: 1.6.1.3 Competent Person Qualifications 1.6.1.3.1 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry 1.6.1.3.2 Competent Person for Scaffolding 1.6.1.3.3 Competent Person for Fall Protection 1.6.1.4 Qualified Trainer Requirements 1.6.1.5 Crane Operators/Riggers 1.6.2 Personnel Duties 1.6.2.1 Duties of the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) 1.6.3 Meetings 1.6.3.1 Preconstruction Conference 1.6.3.2 Safety Meetings 1.7 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP) 1.7.1 Names and Qualifications 1.7.2 Plans 1.7.2.1 Confined Space Entry Plan 1.7.2.2 Standard Lift Plan (SLP)



1.7.2.3 Critical Lift Plan - Crane or Load Handling Equipment 1.7.2.4 Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan 1.7.2.5 Excavation Plan 1.7.2.6 Site Demolition Plan 1.8 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA) 1.8.1 AHA Management 1.8.2 AHA Signature Log 1.9 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION 1.9.1 Safety Bulletin Board 1.9.2 Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System 1.10 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS 1.11 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT 1.12 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS 1.12.1 Mishap Notification 1.12.2 Accident Reports 1.12.3 LHE Inspection Reports 1.12.4 Certificate of Compliance and Pre-lift Plan/Checklist for LHE

and Rigging 1.13 HOT WORK 1.13.1 Permit and Personnel Requirements 1.13.2 Work Around Flammable Materials 1.14 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS. 1.14.1 Entry Procedures 1.14.2 Forced Air Ventilation 1.14.3 Rescue Procedures and Coordination with Local Emergency

Responders 1.15 DIVE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 1.16 SEVERE STORM PLAN

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK 3.1.1 Worksite Communication 3.1.2 Hazardous Material Exclusions 3.1.3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material 3.2 FALL PROTECTION PROGRAM 3.2.1 Training 3.2.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems 3.2.2.1 Additional Personal Fall Protection 3.2.2.2 Personal Fall Protection Harnesses 3.2.3 Horizontal Lifelines (HLL) 3.2.4 Guardrails and Safety Nets 3.2.5 Rescue and Evacuation Plan and Procedures 3.3 WORK PLATFORMS 3.3.1 Scaffolding 3.3.2 Elevated Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs) 3.4 EQUIPMENT 3.4.1 Material Handling Equipment (MHE) 3.4.2 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) 3.4.3 Machinery and Mechanized Equipment 3.4.4 USE OF EXPLOSIVES 3.5 EXCAVATIONS 3.6 ELECTRICAL 3.6.1 Conduct of Electrical Work 3.6.2 Qualifications 3.6.3 Arc Flash



3.6.4 Grounding 3.6.5 Testing




SECTION 01 35 26

GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS11/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)

ASSE/SAFE A10.34 (2001; R 2012) Protection of the Public on or Adjacent to Construction Sites

ASSE/SAFE Z359.0 (2012) Definitions and Nomenclature Used for Fall Protection and Fall Arrest

ASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components

ASSE/SAFE Z359.11 (2014) Safety Requirements for Full Body Harnesses

ASSE/SAFE Z359.12 (2009) Connecting Components for Personal Fall Arrest Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.13 (2013) Personal Energy Absorbers and Energy Absorbing Lanyards

ASSE/SAFE Z359.14 (2014) Safety Requirements for Self-Retracting Devices for Personal Fall Arrest and Rescue Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.15 (2014) Safety Requirements for Single Anchor Lifelines and Fall Arresters for Personal Fall Arrest Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 (2007) Minimum Requirements for a Comprehensive Managed Fall Protection Program

ASSE/SAFE Z359.3 (2007) Safety Requirements for Positioning and Travel Restraint Systems

ASSE/SAFE Z359.4 (2013) Safety Requirements for Assisted-Rescue and Self-Rescue Systems, Subsystems and Components

ASSE/SAFE Z359.6 (2009) Specifications and Design Requirements for Active Fall Protection Systems



ASSE/SAFE Z359.7 (2011) Qualification and Verification Testing of Fall Protection Products

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B30.20 (2013; INT Oct 2010 - May 2012) Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices

ASME B30.22 (2016) Articulating Boom Cranes

ASME B30.26 (2015; INT Jun 2010 - Jun 2014) Rigging Hardware

ASME B30.3 (2016) Tower Cranes

ASME B30.5 (2014) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes

ASME B30.8 (2015) Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks

ASME B30.9 (2014; INT Feb 2011 - Nov 2013) Slings

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM F855 (2015) Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE 1048 (2003) Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines

IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017) National Electrical Safety Code

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 10 (2018; TIA 18-1) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration, and Demolition Operations

NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work

NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6; TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10; TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14) National Electrical Code

NFPA 70E (2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 81-2) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace



U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces

29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)

29 CFR 1915 Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard Employment

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

29 CFR 1926.1400 Cranes and Derricks in Construction

29 CFR 1926.16 Rules of Construction

29 CFR 1926.450 Scaffolds

29 CFR 1926.500 Fall Protection

CPL 2.100 (1995) Application of the Permit-Required Confined Spaces (PRCS) Standards, 29 CFR 1910.146

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Competent Person (CP)

The CP is a person designated in writing, who, through training, knowledge and experience, is capable of identifying, evaluating, and addressing existing and predictable hazards in the working environment or working conditions that are dangerous to personnel, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures with regards to such hazards.

1.2.2 Competent Person, Confined Space

The CP, Confined Space, is a person meeting the competent person requirements as defined EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, with thorough knowledge of OSHA’s Confined Space Standard, 29 CFR 1910.146, and designated in writing to be responsible for the immediate supervision, implementation and monitoring of the confined space program, who through training, knowledge and experience in confined space entry is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential confined space hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.3 Competent Person, Cranes and Rigging

The CP, Cranes and Rigging, as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, is a person meeting the competent person, who has been designated in writing to



be responsible for the immediate supervision, implementation and monitoring of the Crane and Rigging Program, who through training, knowledge and experience in crane and rigging is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.4 Competent Person, Excavation/Trenching

A CP, Excavation/Trenching, is a person meeting the competent person requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q and 29 CFR 1926, who has been designated in writing to be responsible for the immediate supervision, implementation and monitoring of the excavation/trenching program, who through training, knowledge and experience in excavation/trenching is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.5 Competent Person, Fall Protection

The CP, Fall Protection, is a person meeting the competent person requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q and in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, who has been designated in writing by the employer to be responsible for immediate supervising, implementing and monitoring of the fall protection program, who through training, knowledge and experience in fall protection and rescue systems and equipment, is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential fall hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.6 Competent Person, Scaffolding

The CP, Scaffolding is a person meeting the competent person requirements in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, and designated in writing by the employer to be responsible for immediate supervising, implementing and monitoring of the scaffolding program. The CP for Scaffolding has enough training, knowledge and experience in scaffolding to correctly identify, evaluate and address existing and potential hazards and also has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to these hazards. CP qualifications must be documented and include experience on the specific scaffolding systems/types being used, assessment of the base material that the scaffold will be erected upon, load calculations for materials and personnel, and erection and dismantling. The CP for scaffolding must have a documented, minimum of 8-hours of scaffold training to include training on the specific type of scaffold being used (e.g. mast-climbing, adjustable, tubular frame), in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 22.B.02.

1.2.7 Competent Person (CP) Trainer

A competent person trainer as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, who is qualified in the material presented, and who possesses a working knowledge of applicable technical regulations, standards, equipment and systems related to the subject matter on which they are training Competent Persons. A competent person trainer must be familiar with the typical hazards and the equipment used in the industry they are instructing. The training provided by the competent person trainer must be appropriate to that specific industry. The competent person trainer must evaluate the knowledge and skills of the competent persons as part of the training process.



1.2.8 High Risk Activities

High Risk Activities are activities that involve work at heights, crane and rigging, excavations and trenching, scaffolding, electrical work, and confined space entry.

1.2.9 High Visibility Accident

A High Visibility Accident is any mishap which may generate publicity or high visibility.

1.2.10 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)

LHE is a term used to describe cranes, hoists and all other hoisting equipment (hoisting equipment means equipment, including crane, derricks, hoists and power operated equipment used with rigging to raise, lower or horizontally move a load).

1.2.11 Medical Treatment

Medical Treatment is treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel.

1.2.12 Near Miss

A Near Miss is a mishap resulting in no personal injury and zero property damage, but given a shift in time or position, damage or injury may have occurred (e.g., a worker falls off a scaffold and is not injured; a crane swings around to move the load and narrowly misses a parked vehicle).

1.2.13 Operating Envelope

The Operating Envelope is the area surrounding any crane or load handling equipment. Inside this "envelope" is the crane, the operator, riggers and crane walkers, other personnel involved in the operation, rigging gear between the hook, the load, the crane's supporting structure (i.e. ground or rail), the load's rigging path, the lift and rigging procedure.

1.2.14 Qualified Person (QP)

The QP is a person designated in writing, who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated their ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.

1.2.15 Qualified Person, Fall Protection (QP for FP)

A QP for FP is a person meeting the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, with a recognized degree or professional certificate and with extensive knowledge, training and experience in the fall protection and rescue field who is capable of designing, analyzing, and evaluating and specifying fall protection and rescue systems.

1.2.16 Recordable Injuries or Illnesses

Recordable Injuries or Illnesses are any work-related injury or illness



that results in:

a. Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the length of the illness;

b. Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness onset);

c. Restricted work;

d. Transfer to another job;

e. Medical treatment beyond first aid;

f. Loss of consciousness; or

g. A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (a) through (f) above.

1.2.17 USACE Property and Equipment

Interpret "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 as Government property and equipment.

1.2.18 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) Accident or Load Handling Equipment Mishap

A LHE accident occurs when any one or more of the eight elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation, including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload; or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, or other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and collision are considered accidents, even though no material damage or injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, or roll over). Document any mishap that meets the criteria described in the Contractor Significant Incident Report (CSIR) using the Crane High Hazard working group mishap reporting form.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G

SD-06 Test Reports

Monthly Exposure Reports

Notifications and Reports



Accident Reports; G

LHE Inspection Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Crane Operators/Riggers

Standard Lift Plan; G

Critical Lift Plan ; G

Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

Confined Space Entry Permit

Hot Work Permit

Certificate of Compliance

License Certificates

1.4 MONTHLY EXPOSURE REPORTS

Provide a Monthly Exposure Report and attach to the monthly billing request. This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked each month for all site workers, both Prime and subcontractor. Failure to submit the report may result in retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract, comply with the most recent edition of USACE EM 385-1-1, and all applicable laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern.

1.6 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES, AND MEETINGS

1.6.1 Personnel Qualifications

1.6.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

Provide an SSHO that meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 1. The SSHO may not serve as the project superintendent and shall have no other duties. The SSHO must ensure that the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.16 are met for the project. Provide a Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) person at each project site to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The SSHO or an equally-qualified Alternate SSHO must be at the work site at all times to implement and administer the Contractor's safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention Plan. The SSHO and Alternate SSHO must have the required training, experience, and qualifications in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 01.A.17, and all associated sub-paragraphs.



If the SSHO is off-site for a period longer than 24 hours, an equally-qualified alternate SSHO must be provided and must fulfill the same roles and responsibilities as the primary SSHO. When the SSHO is temporarily (up to 24 hours) off-site, a Designated Representative (DR), as identified in the AHA may be used in lieu of an Alternate SSHO, and must be on the project site at all times when work is being performed. Note that the DR is a collateral duty safety position, with safety duties in addition to their full time occupation.

1.6.1.2 Contractor Quality Control (QC) Manager:

The Contractor Quality Control Manager cannot be the SSHO on this project, even though the QC has safety inspection responsibilities as part of the QC duties.

1.6.1.3 Competent Person Qualifications

Provide Competent Persons in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix Q and herein. Competent Persons for high risk activities include confined space, cranes and rigging, excavation/trenching, fall protection, and electrical work. The CP for these activities must be designated in writing, and meet the requirements for the specific activity (i.e. competent person, fall protection).

The Competent Person identified in the Contractor's Safety and Health Program and accepted Accident Prevention Plan, must be on-site at all times when the work that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is being performed. Provide the credentials of the Competent Persons(s) to the the Contracting Officer for information in consultation with the Safety Office.

1.6.1.3.1 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry

Provide a Confined Space (CP) Competent Person who meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Appendix Q, and herein. The CP for Confined Space Entry must supervise the entry into each confined space.

1.6.1.3.2 Competent Person for Scaffolding

Provide a Competent Person for Scaffolding who meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 22.B.02 and herein.

1.6.1.3.3 Competent Person for Fall Protection

Provide a Competent Person for Fall Protection who meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C.04 and herein.

1.6.1.4 Qualified Trainer Requirements

Individuals qualified to instruct the 40 hour contract safety awareness course, or portions thereof, must meet the definition of a Competent Person Trainer, and, at a minimum, possess a working knowledge of the following subject areas: EM 385-1-1, Electrical Standards,Lockout/Tagout, Fall Protection, Confined Space Entry for Construction; Excavation, Trenching and Soil Mechanics, and Scaffolds in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.450, Subpart L.

Instructors are required to:



a. Prepare class presentations that cover construction-related safety requirements.

b. Ensure that all attendees attend all sessions by using a class roster signed daily by each attendee. Maintain copies of the roster for at least five (5) years. This is a certification class and must be attended 100 percent. In cases of emergency where an attendee cannot make it to a session, the attendee can make it up in another class session for the same subject.

c. Update training course materials whenever an update of the EM 385-1-1 becomes available.

d. Provide a written exam of at least 50 questions. Students are required to answer 80 percent correctly to pass.

e. Request, review and incorporate student feedback into a continuous course improvement program.

1.6.1.5 Crane Operators/Riggers

Provide Operators meeting the requirements in EM 385-1-1, Section 15.B for Riggers and Section 16.B for Crane Operators. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacities of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate crane operators qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (i.e., union, a government agency, or an organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.

1.6.2 Personnel Duties

1.6.2.1 Duties of the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

The SSHO must:

a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily production report.

b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required accident reports. Report mishaps and near misses.

c. Use and maintain OSHA's Form 300 to log work-related injuries and illnesses occurring on the project site for Prime Contractors and subcontractors, and make available to the Contracting Officer upon request. Post and maintain the Form 300A on the site Safety Bulletin Board.

d. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.

e. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including preparatory meetings, and periodic in-progress meetings.

f. Review the APP and AHAs for compliance with EM 385-1-1, and approve, sign, implement and enforce them.

g. Establish a Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking



System that lists and monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution.

h. Ensure subcontractor compliance with safety and health requirements.

i. Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material Safety Data Sheets (SDS).

j. Maintain a weekly list of high hazard activities involving energy, equipment, excavation, entry into confined space, and elevation, and be prepared to discuss details during QC Meetings.

k. Provide and keep a record of site safety orientation and indoctrination for Contractor employees, subcontractor employees, and site visitors.

Superintendent, QC Manager, and SSHO are subject to dismissal if the above duties are not being effectively carried out. If Superintendent, QC Manager, or SSHO are dismissed, project work will be stopped and will not be allowed to resume until a suitable replacement is approved and the above duties are again being effectively carried out.

1.6.3 Meetings

1.6.3.1 Preconstruction Conference

a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project must attend the preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent, Site Safety and Occupational Health officer, quality control manager, or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).

b. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans, programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting Officer as to which phases will require an analysis. In addition, establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal, and Government review of AHAs to preclude project delays.

c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP, identified during the Contracting Officer's review, must be corrected, and the APP re-submitted for review prior to the start of construction. Work is not permitted to begin work until an APP is established that is acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

d. The functions of a Preconstruction conference may take place at the Post-Award Kickoff meeting for Design Build Contracts.

1.6.3.2 Safety Meetings

Conduct safety meetings to review past activities, plan for new or changed operations, review pertinent aspects of appropriate AHA (by trade), establish safe working procedures for anticipated hazards, and provide pertinent Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) training and motivation. Conduct meetings at least once a month for all supervisors on the project location. The SSHO, supervisors, foremen, or CDSOs must conduct meetings



at least once a week for the trade workers. Document meeting minutes to include the date, persons in attendance, subjects discussed, and names of individual(s) who conducted the meeting. Maintain documentation on-site and furnish copies to the Contracting Officer on request. Notify the Contracting Officer of all scheduled meetings 7 calendar days in advance.

1.7 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)

A qualified person must prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in EM 385-1-1, Appendix A. The APP must be job-specific and address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. One safety aspect unique to this project that shall be specifically addressed in the APP is the safety of the public with respect to the presence of recreational boaters and fishermen. The APP must interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element, and made site-specific. Describe the methods to evaluate past safety performance of potential subcontractors in the selection process. Also, describe innovative methods used to ensure and monitor safe work practices of subcontractors. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP must be signed by an officer of the firm (Prime Contractor senior person), the individual preparing the APP, the on-site superintendent, the designated SSHO, the Contractor Quality Control Manager, and any designated Certified Safety Professional (CSP) or Certified Health Physicist (CIH). The SSHO must provide and maintain the APP and a log of signatures by each subcontractor foreman, attesting that they have read and understand the APP, and make the APP and log available on-site to the Contracting Officer. If English is not the foreman's primary language, the Prime Contractor must provide an interpreter.

Submit an outline for the APP no more than 30 days after contract award. Submit the full APP so that Government approval is obtained no more than 60 days after issuance of the NTP. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. Once reviewed and accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP is cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified. Continuously review and amend the APP, as necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Changes to the accepted APP must be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and Quality Control Manager. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP as they are discovered. Should any severe hazard exposure (i.e. imminent danger) become evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate and remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34), and the environment.



1.7.1 Names and Qualifications

Provide plans in accordance with the requirements outlined in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1, including the following:

a. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training, experience and certifications) of site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated Site Safety and Health Officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used. Specify the duties of each position.

b. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum, designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection; hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; and personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and maintenance.

1.7.2 Plans

Provide plans in the APP in accordance with the requirements outlined in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1, including the following:

1.7.2.1 Confined Space Entry Plan

Develop a confined or enclosed space entry plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1, applicable OSHA standards 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1915, and 29 CFR 1926, OSHA Directive CPL 2.100, and any other federal, state and local regulatory requirements identified in this contract. Identify the qualified person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate the qualified person's authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there is no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space work exists and none will be created.)

1.7.2.2 Standard Lift Plan (SLP)

Plan lifts to avoid situations where the operator cannot maintain safe control of the lift. Prepare a written SLP in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.A.03, using Form 16-2 for every lift or series of lifts (if duty cycle or routine lifts are being performed). The SLP must be developed, reviewed and accepted by all personnel involved in the lift in conjunction with the associated AHA. Signature on the AHA constitutes acceptance of the plan. Maintain the SLP on the LHE for the current lift(s) being made. Maintain historical SLPs for a minimum of 3 months.

1.7.2.3 Critical Lift Plan - Crane or Load Handling Equipment

Provide a Critical Lift Plan as required by EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.01, using Form 16-3. Critical lifts require detailed planning and additional or unusual safety precautions. Develop and submit a critical lift plan to the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days prior to critical lift. Comply with load testing requirements in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.F.03.

In addition to the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.02, the critical lift plan must include the following:



a. For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1400 and EM 385-1-1, Section 16.T.

b. For barge mounted mobile cranes, provide a Naval Architecture Analysis and include an LHE Manufacturer's Floating Service Load Chart in accordance with the criteria from the selected standard in EM 385-1-1, Section 16.L.02. The Floating Service Load Chart must provide a table of rated load versus boom angle and radius. The Floating Service Load Chart must also provide the maximum allowable machine list and trim associated with the tabular loads and radii provided. If the Manufacturer's Floating Service Load Chart is not available, a floating service load chart may be developed and provided by a qualified Registered Professional Engineer (RPE), competent in the field of floating cranes. The Load Chart must be in accordance with the criteria from the selected standard in EM 385-1-1, Section 16.L; provide a table of rated load versus boom angle and radius; provide the maximum allowable machine list and machine trim associated with the tabular loads and radii provided; and be stamped by a RPE qualified and competent in the field of floating cranes. The RPE, competent in the field of floating cranes must stamp and certify (sign) that the Naval Architectural Analysis (NAA) meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 16.L.03.

c. Multi-purpose machines, material handling equipment, and construction equipment used to lift loads that are suspended by rigging gear, require proof of authorization from the machine OEM that the machine is capable of making lifts of loads suspended by rigging equipment. Demonstrate that the operator is properly trained and that the equipment is properly configured to make such lifts and is equipped with a load chart.

1.7.2.4 Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan

The plan must comply with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 21.D and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, be site specific, and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction. Address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 6 feet. A competent person or qualified person for fall protection must prepare and sign the plan documentation. Include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods employed for every phase of work, roles and responsibilities, assisted rescue, self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and monitoring methods. Review and revise, as necessary, the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation as conditions change, but at a minimum every six months, for lengthy projects, reflecting any changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel, equipment, systems or work habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation at the job site for the duration of the project. Include the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).

1.7.2.5 Excavation Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects of excavation, and provide and prepare the plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 25.A and Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL.



1.7.2.6 Site Demolition Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects, and prepare in accordance with Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION and referenced sources.

1.8 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)

Submit a sample AHA for approval no more than 30 days after contract award to ensure understanding of the AHA procedure. Before beginning each activity, task or Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous project operations, or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform the work, the Contractor(s) performing that work activity must prepare an AHA. AHAs must be developed by the Prime Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier performing the work, and provided for Prime Contractor review and approval before submitting to the Contracting Officer. AHAs must be signed by the SSHO, Superintendent, QC Manager and the subcontractor Foreman performing the work. Format the AHA in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 1 or as directed by the Contracting Officer. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 working days prior to the start of each activity task, or DFOW. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to revise and resubmit the AHA if it fails to effectively identify the work sequences, specific anticipated hazards, site conditions, equipment, materials, personnel and the control measures to be implemented.

AHAs must identify competent persons required for phases involving high risk activities, including confined entry, crane and rigging, excavations, trenching, electrical work, fall protection, and scaffolding.

1.8.1 AHA Management

Review the AHA list periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting, and update as necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change. Use the AHA during daily inspections by the SSHO to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the required safety and health controls for that work activity.

1.8.2 AHA Signature Log

Each employee performing work as part of an activity, task or DFOW must review the AHA for that work and sign a signature log specifically maintained for that AHA prior to starting work on that activity. The SSHO must maintain a signature log on site for every AHA. Provide employees whose primary language is other than English, with an interpreter to ensure a clear understanding of the AHA and its contents.

1.9 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION

1.9.1 Safety Bulletin Board

Within one calendar day(s) after commencement of work, erect a safety bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method, acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all mandatory information for employee and visitor review, may be deemed as meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1, Section 01.A.07. Additional items required to be posted include:



a. Confined space entry permit.

b. Hot work permit.

1.9.2 Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System

Establish a SOH deficiency tracking system that lists and monitors the status of SOH deficiencies in chronological order. Use the tracking system to evaluate the effectiveness of the APP. A monthly evaluation of the data must be discussed in the QC or SOH meeting with everyone on the project. The list must be posted on the project bulletin board and updated daily, and provide the following information:

a. Date deficiency identified;

b. Description of deficiency;

c. Name of person responsible for correcting deficiency;

d. Projected resolution date;

e. Date actually resolved.

1.10 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS

Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including those listed in paragraph REFERENCES. Maintain applicable equipment manufacturer's manuals.

1.11 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT

Contractors must arrange for their own emergency medical treatment. Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.

1.12 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS

1.12.1 Mishap Notification

Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but no more than twenty-four hours, after any mishaps, including recordable accidents, incidents, and near misses, as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, any report of injury, illness, load handling equipment (LHE) or rigging mishaps, or any property damage. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining appropriate medical and emergency assistance and for notifying fire, law enforcement, and regulatory agencies. Immediate reporting is required for electrical mishaps, to include Arc Flash; shock; uncontrolled release of hazardous energy (includes electrical and non-electrical); load handling equipment or rigging; fall from height (any level other than same surface); and underwater diving. These mishaps must be investigated in depth to identify all causes and to recommend hazard control measures.

Within notification include Contractor name; contract title; type of contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of accident (for example, type of construction equipment used and PPE used). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation is conducted. Assist and cooperate fully with the Government's



investigation(s) of any mishap.

1.12.2 Accident Reports

a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and illnesses, property damage, and near misses as defined in EM 385-1-1, to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete the applicable USACE Accident Report Form 3394, and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 5 calendar day(s) of the accident. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special forms.

b. Near Misses: For Army projects, report all "Near Misses" to the GDA, using local mishap reporting procedures, within 24 hrs. The Contracting Officer will provide the Contractor the required forms. Near miss reports are considered positive and proactive Contractor safety management actions.

c. Conduct an accident investigation for any load handling equipment accident (including rigging gear accidents) to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete the LHE Accident Report (Crane and Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report form.

1.12.3 LHE Inspection Reports

Submit LHE inspection reports required in accordance with EM 385-1-1 and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.

1.12.4 Certificate of Compliance and Pre-lift Plan/Checklist for LHE and Rigging

Provide a FORM 16-1 Certificate of Compliance for LHE entering an activity under this contract and in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Post certifications on the crane.

Develop a Standard Lift Plan (SLP) in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.03 using Form 16-2 Standard Pre-Lift Crane Plan/Checklist for each lift planned. Submit SLP to the Contracting Officer for approval within 15 calendar days in advance of planned lift.

1.13 HOT WORK

1.13.1 Permit and Personnel Requirements

Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (i.e. welding or cutting) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices, from the fire division A permit is required from the Explosives Safety Office for work in and around where explosives are processed, stored, or handled. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. Provide at least two 20 pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". The extinguishers must be current inspection tagged, and contain an approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch must be trained in accordance



with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of one hour after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.

When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency Fire Divisionphone number. REPORT ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW SMALL, TO THE RESPONSIBLE FIRE DIVISION IMMEDIATELY.

1.13.2 Work Around Flammable Materials

Obtain services from a NFPA Certified Marine Chemist for "HOT WORK" within or around flammable materials (such as fuel systems or welding/cutting on fuel pipes) or confined spaces (such as sewer wet wells, manholes, or vaults) that have the potential for flammable or explosive atmospheres.

Whenever these materials, except beryllium and chromium (VI), are encountered in indoor operations, local mechanical exhaust ventilation systems that are sufficient to reduce and maintain personal exposures to within acceptable limits must be used and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and supplemented by exceptions noted in EM 385-1-1, Section 06.H

1.14 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.

Confined space entry must comply with Section 34 of EM 385-1-1, OSHA 29 CFR 1926, OSHA 29 CFR 1910, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146, and OSHA Directive CPL 2.100. Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used.

1.14.1 Entry Procedures

Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel for any purpose, including hot work, until the qualified person has conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are controlled or eliminated and documented. Comply with EM 385-1-1, Section 34 for entry procedures. Hazards pertaining to the space must be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA.

1.14.2 Forced Air Ventilation

Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its action level.

1.14.3 Rescue Procedures and Coordination with Local Emergency Responders

Develop and implement an on-site rescue and recovery plan and procedures. The rescue plan must not rely on local emergency responders for rescue from a confined space.

1.15 DIVE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Develop a Dive Operations Plan, AHA, emergency management plan, and personnel list that includes qualifications, for each separate diving operation. Submit these documents to the District Dive Coordinator (DDC) for review and acceptance at least 15 working days prior to commencement of diving operations. These documents must be at the diving location at all times. Provide each of these documents as a part of the project file.



1.16 SEVERE STORM PLAN

In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:

a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could be damaged in protected areas.

b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment, debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing facilities.

c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK

Comply with EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, the APP, the AHA, Federal and State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.

PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is performing. Use personal hearing protection at all times in designated noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety glasses must be worn or carried/available on each person. Mandatory PPE includes:

a. Hard Hat

b. Long Pants

c. Appropriate Safety Shoes

d. Appropriate Class Reflective Vests

3.1.1 Worksite Communication

Employees working alone in a remote location or away from other workers must be provided an effective means of emergency communications (i.e., cellular phone, two-way radios, land-line telephones or other acceptable means). The selected communication must be readily available (easily within the immediate reach) of the employee and must be tested prior to the start of work to verify that it effectively operates in the area/environment. An employee check-in/check-out communication procedure must be developed to ensure employee safety.

3.1.2 Hazardous Material Exclusions

Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract, radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or



polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocyanates, lead-based paint, and hexavalent chromium, are prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials. Low mercury lamps used within fluorescent lighting fixtures are allowed as an exception without further Contracting Officer approval. Notify the Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) prior to excepted items of radioactive material and devices being brought on base.

3.1.3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material

Contract documents identify materials such as PCB, lead paint, and friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e. 29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If material(s) that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance are encountered during construction operations, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant to FAR 52.243-4, "Changes" and FAR 52.236-2, "Differing Site Conditions."

3.2 FALL PROTECTION PROGRAM

Establish a fall protection program, for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company policy, identify roles and responsibilities, education and training requirements, fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection, storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and evacuation procedures in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 and EM 385-1-1, Sections 21.A and 21.D.

3.2.1 Training

Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Protection Program, provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person for fall protection in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C. Document training and practical application of the competent person in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C.04 and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 in the AHA.

3.2.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems

Enforce use of personal fall protection equipment and systems designated (to include fall arrest, restraint, and positioning) for each specific work activity in the Site Specific Fall Protection and Prevention Plan and AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard. Protect employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 21.

Provide personal fall protection equipment, systems, subsystems, and components that comply with EM 385-1-1 Section 21.I, 29 CFR 1926.500 Subpart M,ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, ASSE/SAFE Z359.1, ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, ASSE/SAFE Z359.3, ASSE/SAFE Z359.4, ASSE/SAFE Z359.6, ASSE/SAFE Z359.7, ASSE/SAFE Z359.11, ASSE/SAFE Z359.12, ASSE/SAFE Z359.13, ASSE/SAFE Z359.14, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.15.

3.2.2.1 Additional Personal Fall Protection

In addition to the required fall protection systems, other protection such



as safety skiffs, personal floatation devices, and life rings, are required when working above or next to water in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Sections 21.O through 21.O.06. Personal fall protection systems and equipment are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended platform. In addition, personal fall protection systems are required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts. The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising, lowering, travel, or while performing work.

3.2.2.2 Personal Fall Protection Harnesses

Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest body support device. The use of body belts is not acceptable. Harnesses must have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Snap hooks and carabiners must be self-closing and self-locking, capable of being opened only by at least two consecutive deliberate actions and have a minimum gate strength of 3,600 lbs in all directions. Use webbing, straps, and ropes made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment must not exceed 6 feet, unless the proper energy absorbing lanyard is used. Always take into consideration the total fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion), that can occur during a fall, when attaching a person to a fall arrest system. All full body harnesses must be equipped with Suspension Trauma Preventers such as stirrups, relief steps, or similar in order to provide short-term relief from the effects of orthostatic intolerance in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.I.06.

3.2.3 Horizontal Lifelines (HLL)

Provide HLL in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.I.08.d.2. Commercially manufactured horizontal lifelines (HLL) must be designed, installed, certified and used, under the supervision of a qualified person, for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500). The competent person for fall protection may (if deemed appropriate by the qualified person) supervise the assembly, disassembly, use and inspection of the HLL system under the direction of the qualified person. Locally manufactured HLLs are not acceptable unless they are custom designed for limited or site specific applications by a Registered Professional Engineer who is qualified in designing HLL systems.

3.2.4 Guardrails and Safety Nets

Design, install and use guardrails and safety nets in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.F.01 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M.

3.2.5 Rescue and Evacuation Plan and Procedures

When personal fall arrest systems are used, ensure that the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. Prepare a Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue or assisted-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility. Include the Rescue and Evacuation Plan within the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of



work, in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). The plan must comply with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.4.

3.3 WORK PLATFORMS

3.3.1 Scaffolding

Provide employees with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet in height must be accessed by use of a scaffold stair system.

b. Ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers are

prohibited for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet maximum in height.

c. An adequate gate is required.

d. Employees performing scaffold erection and dismantling must be qualified.

e. Scaffold must be capable of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan.

f. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or backward.

g. Special care must be given to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded.

h. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material are prohibited. The first tie-in must be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base.

i. Scaffolding other than suspended types must bear on base plates upon wood mudsills (2 in x 10 in x 8 in minimum) or other adequate firm foundation.

j. Scaffold or work platform erectors must have fall protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than 6 feet.

k. Delineate fall protection requirements when working above 6 feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work.

3.3.2 Elevated Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs)

Workers must be anchored to the basket or bucket in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions (anchoring to the boom may only be used when allowed by the manufacturer and permitted by the CP). Lanyards used must be sufficiently short to prohibit worker from climbing out of basket. The climbing of rails is prohibited. Lanyards with built-in shock absorbers are acceptable. Self-retracting devices are not



acceptable. Tying off to an adjacent pole or structure is not permitted unless a safe device for 100 percent tie-off is used for the transfer.

Use of AWPs must be operated, inspected, and maintained as specified in the operating manual for the equipment and delineated in the AHA. Operators of AWPs must be designated as qualified operators by the Prime Contractor. Maintain proof of qualifications on site for review and include in the AHA.

3.4 EQUIPMENT

3.4.1 Material Handling Equipment (MHE)

a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts must not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating instructions. Material handling equipment fitted with personnel work platform attachments are prohibited from traveling or positioning while personnel are working on the platform.

b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Material Handling Equipment Operators must be trained in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910, Subpart N.

c. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks must be licensed in accordance with OSHA.

3.4.2 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)

a. Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 16.

b. Notify the Contracting Officer 15 working days in advance of any LHE entering the activity, in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.A.02, so that necessary quality assurance spot checks can be coordinated.Contractor's operator must remain with the crane during the spot check. Rigging gear must comply with OSHA, ASME B30.9 Standards safety standards.

c. Comply with the LHE manufacturer's specifications and limitations for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person (as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures.

d. Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22 for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes, ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks, ASME B30.9 for slings, ASME B30.20 for below the hook lifting devices and ASME B30.26 for rigging hardware.

e. Under no circumstance must a Contractor make a lift at or above 90 percent of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.

f. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines, operators and riggers must be alert to this special hazard and follow the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 11, and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22 as applicable.

g. Do not use crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless



the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane. Additionally, submit a specific AHA for this work to the Contracting Officer. Ensure the activity and AHA are thoroughly reviewed by all involved personnel.

h. Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

i. All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads.

j. Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.

k. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. Side loading of the crane is prohibited.

l. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel access where accessible areas of the LHE's rotating superstructure poses a risk of striking, pinching or crushing personnel.

m. Maintain inspection records in accordance by EM 385-1-1, Section 16.D, including shift, monthly, and annual inspections, the signature of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other identifier of the LHE that was inspected. Records must be available for review by the Contracting Officer.

n. Maintain written reports of operational and load testing in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.F, listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the LHE. Reports must be available for review by the Contracting Officer.

o. Certify that all LHE operators have been trained in proper use of all safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).

p. Take steps to ensure that wind speed does not contribute to loss of control of the load during lifting operations. At wind speeds greater than 20 mph, the operator, rigger and lift supervisor must cease all crane operations, evaluate conditions and determine if the lift may proceed. Base the determination to proceed or not on wind calculations per the manufacturer and a reduction in LHE rated capacity if applicable. Include this maximum wind speed determination as part of the activity hazard analysis plan for that operation.

3.4.3 Machinery and Mechanized Equipment

a. Proof of qualifications for operator must be kept on the project site for review.

b. Manufacture specifications or owner's manual for the equipment must be on-site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE EM 385-1-1. Incorporate such additional safety precautions or requirements into the AHAs.

3.4.4 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

Explosives must not be used or brought to the project site without prior written approval from the Contracting Officer. Such approval does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for injury to persons or for



damage to property due to blasting operations.

Storage of explosives, when permitted on Government property, must be only where directed and in approved storage facilities. These facilities must be kept locked at all times except for inspection, delivery, and withdrawal of explosives.

3.5 EXCAVATIONS

Soil classification must be performed by a competent person in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 and EM 385-1-1.

3.6 ELECTRICAL

Perform electrical work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, Sections 11 and 12.

3.6.1 Conduct of Electrical Work

As delineated in EM 385-1-1, electrical work is to be conducted in a de-energized state unless there is no alternative method for accomplishing the work. In those cases obtain an energized work permit from the Contracting Officer. The energized work permit application must be accompanied by the AHA and a summary of why the equipment/circuit needs to be worked energized. Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Attach temporary grounds in accordance with ASTM F855 and IEEE 1048. Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator is allowed in the space during the actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method.

When working in energized substations, only qualified electrical workers are permitted to enter. When work requires work near energized circuits as defined by NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes, insulating gloves and electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E. Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching suits may also be required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractor's AHA. Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these procedures and 29 CFR 1910.147.

3.6.2 Qualifications

Electrical work must be performed by QP personnel with verifiable credentials who are familiar with applicable code requirements. Verifiable credentials consist of State, National and Local Certifications or Licenses that a Master or Journeyman Electrician may hold, depending on work being performed, and must be identified in the appropriate AHA. Journeyman/Apprentice ratio must be in accordance with State, Local requirements applicable to where work is being performed.

3.6.3 Arc Flash

Conduct a hazard analysis/arc flash hazard analysis whenever work on or near energized parts greater than 50 volts is necessary, in accordance with



NFPA 70E.

All personnel entering the identified arc flash protection boundary must be QPs and properly trained in NFPA 70E requirements and procedures. Unless permitted by NFPA 70E, no Unqualified Person is permitted to approach nearer than the Limited Approach Boundary of energized conductors and circuit parts. Training must be administered by an electrically qualified source and documented.

3.6.4 Grounding

Ground electrical circuits, equipment and enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 to provide a permanent, continuous and effective path to ground unless otherwise noted by EM 385-1-1.

Check grounding circuits to ensure that the circuit between the ground and a grounded power conductor has a resistance low enough to permit sufficient current flow to allow the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the current.

3.6.5 Testing

Temporary electrical distribution systems and devices must be inspected, tested and found acceptable for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) protection, polarity, ground continuity, and ground resistance before initial use, before use after modification and at least monthly. Monthly inspections and tests must be maintained for each temporary electrical distribution system, and signed by the electrical CP or QP.






SECTION 01 35 50

PROJECT SITE SECURITY AND AT/OPSEC PROCEDURES

05/24/2016

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL 1.2 REFERENCES 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 EMPLOYEE IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL PROCEDURE 1.5 PRE-SCREENING CONTRACTOR'S ON-SITE EMPLOYEES 1.6 REQUIRED TRAINING 1.6.1 AT Level 1 Training 1.6.2 Suspicious Activity Reporting Training 1.7 ACCESS AND GENERAL PROTECTION/SECURITY POLICY AND PROCEDURES 1.8 ESCORTS 1.9 ELECTRONIC MEDIA PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR 1.10 CONDUCT OF CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES 1.11 RELEASE OF SENSITIVE INFORMATION 1.12 VEHICLES 1.12.1 Parking of Vehicles 1.12.2 Identification of Vehicles 1.13 DAMAGE OR LOSS OF CONTRACTOR'S SUPPLIES AND PROPERTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)




SECTION 01 35 50

PROJECT SITE SECURITY AND AT/OPSEC PROCEDURES05/24/2016

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

The entire Project area is not open to the public. Depending upon the level of security threat, some Project areas may or may not be open to the Contractor and Contractor employees. Guidance and forms for project site security requirements are available on the Nashville District Public Website:http://www.lrn.usace.army.mil/BusinessWithUs/ContractSecurityRequirements.aspx

1.2 REFERENCES


U.S. ARMY (DA)

Army Directive 2014-05 (2014) Policy and Implementation Procedures for Commnon Access Card Credentialing and Installation Access for Uncleared Contractors

DA AR 190-13 (2011) The Army Physical Security Program

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Verified/Eligible Employee Candidates

Employee Identification and Control Procedure; G

Investigation Package

Foreign Nationals

SD-07 Certificates

At Level 1 Training

Suspicious Activity Reporting Training



1.4 EMPLOYEE IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL PROCEDURE

An employee identification and control procedure shall be submitted forapproval for identification and control of employees entering or leaving the project site. It is expected that this will include a unique photoidentification card for each contractor and subcontractor employees working at the project site.

1.5 PRE-SCREENING CONTRACTOR'S ON-SITE EMPLOYEES

The Contractor must pre-screen potential employees to work on this contract using the E-verify Program (https://www.uscis.gov/e-verify) website to meet the established eligibility requirements. The Contractor must ensure that the employee has two valid forms of Government issued identification prior to enrollment to ensure the correct information is entered into the E-verify system. An initial list of verified/eligible employee candidates must be provided to the COR no later than 3 business days after the initial contract award.

1.6 REQUIRED TRAINING

1.6.1 AT Level 1 Training

All contractor and subcontractor employees, requiring access to Army installations, facilities, controlled access areas, or require network access, shall complete AT Level I Awareness Training within 30 calendar days after contract start date or effective date of incorporation of this requirement into the contract, whichever is applicable. Upon request, the contractor shall submit an AT Level I Awareness Training Certificates of Completion for each applicable contract employee and subcontractor employee, to the COR or to the Contracting Officer (if a COR is not assigned), within 5 calendar days after completion of training by all contract personnel. AT Level I Awareness Training is available at the following website:

http://jko.jten.mil/courses/atl1/launch.html Each contract employee must take the training individually to receive a training certificate.

1.6.2 Suspicious Activity Reporting Training

The Contractor and all associated sub-contractors shall receive training on the local Suspicious Activity Reporting Program. This locally developed training will inform employees of the types of behavior to watch for and provide guidance on who to contact to report suspicious activity. This training shall be completed within 30 calendar days of contract award and within 30 calendar days of new employees commencing performance with the results reported to the COR NLT 5 calendar days after the completion of the training." The iWatch training for contractors is available on the Nashville District Public Website:

http://www.lrn.usace.army.mil/BusinessWithUs/ContractSecurityRequirements.aspx

Additional Optional Information Regarding Suspicious Activity Reporting:

a. iWatch Army is available at: http://www.myarmyonesource.com/familyprogramsandservices/iwatchprogram/default.aspx



b. Eye On Kentucky program (report anonymously suspicious criminal or terrorist activity):

http://homelandsecurity.ky.gov/Pages/Eye-on-Kentucky.aspx

c. Tennessee Suspicious Activity Report:

http://www.tennessee.gov/safety/topic/report_susp_act

d. Homeland Security "See Something Say Something":

https://www.dhs.gov/see-something-say-something.

1.7 ACCESS AND GENERAL PROTECTION/SECURITY POLICY AND PROCEDURES

All Contractor and associated sub-contractor employees shall comply with all applicable project and local security policies and procedures (provided by the district representative). The Contractor must also provide all information required for background checks to meet installation/facility access requirements to be accomplished by the District Security Management Office. Contractor workforce must comply with all personal identity verification requirements (FAR Clause 52.204-9, Personal Identity Verification of Contractor Personnel) as directed by DOD, HQDA and/or local policy. In addition to the changes otherwise authorized by the changes clause of this contract, should the Force Protection Condition (FPCON) at any installation or facility change, the Government may require changes in contractor security matters or processes.

Contractor and all associated sub-contractors employees shall comply with adjudication standards and procedures using the National Crime Information Center Interstate Identification Index (NCIC-III) and Terrorist Screening Database (TSDB) (Army Directive 2014-05 / DA AR 190-13), applicable installation, facility and area commander installation/facility access and local security policies and procedures (provided by government representative, as NCIC and TSDB are available), or, at OCONUS locations, in accordance with status of forces agreements and other theater regulations.

Guidance and forms for the background investigation requirements are available on the Nashville District Public Website:http://www.lrn.usace.army.mil/BusinessWithUs/ContractSecurityRequirements.aspx

Background investigations for U.S. Citizens who will work (a) within a controlled area, (b) on a government information system and/or (c) have access to government funds will be submitted in accordance with the appropriate level in Category B.

The background investigation requirements for those U.S. Citizens who will not work (a) within a controlled area, (b) on a government information system and/or (c) have access to government funds is provided in Category A.

Foreign National Contractors: Follow the guidance on the website specified in Category C – Foreign National Contractors.

1.8 ESCORTS

All Contractor employees, including subcontractor employees who are not in possession of the appropriate security clearance or access privileges, will



be escorted in areas where they may be exposed to classified and/or sensitive materials and/or sensitive or restricted areas.

1.9 ELECTRONIC MEDIA PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

The Contractor shall ensure all media, electronic files, etc., it provides to the Government shall be free of viruses, Trojan horses, bots, worms, malware, defects, or any other harmful item of a destructive nature.

1.10 CONDUCT OF CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES

All contractor employees and subcontractors shall conduct themselves in a proper manner at all times. No alcoholic or intoxicating beverages or substances or illegal drugs or controlled substances not prescribed by a physician shall be possessed, consumed, or be under the influence of any such substance while on Government property.

The Contractor shall remove from the site any individual whose continued employment is deemed by the appointed receiving agent to be contrary to the public interest or inconsistent with the best interests of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.

The Contracting Officer or the appointed receiving agent will require the Contractor to immediately remove from the work site anyone who is incompetent or who endangers persons or property or whose physical or mental condition is such that it would impair the employee's ability to satisfactorily perform the work. Notification to the Contractor will be made in writing if time and circumstances permit. Otherwise, notification will be verbal and will be confirmed in writing as soon as possible. No such removal, however, will reduce the Contractor's obligation to perform all work required under this contract and immediate replacement shall be made as required.

1.11 RELEASE OF SENSITIVE INFORMATION

The Contractor shall not make available to the news media or publicly disclose any data generated or reviewed under this Contract. Any inquiry received by the Contractor for information concerning work performed under this Contract shall be referred to the Government for evaluation under the Freedom of Information Act of 1975, Public Law 93-502, 5 U.S.C., Section 552. The determination of whether records will be released will remain with the Government. The Contractor shall assist the COR in compiling information or records for submission upon request by the government. Reports and data generated under this Contract shall become the property of the Government and distribution to any other source by the Contractor, unless authorized is prohibited.

1.12 VEHICLES

1.12.1 Parking of Vehicles

Parking of private and Contractor vehicles shall be restricted to the areas designated by the Government. Vehicles shall be parked no closer than 30 feet from occupied buildings.

1.12.2 Identification of Vehicles

The Contractor shall supply the Government with an up-to-date vehicle list that identifies contractor vehicles by license plate number, make and model



of vehicle.

1.13 DAMAGE OR LOSS OF CONTRACTOR'S SUPPLIES AND PROPERTY

The Contractor is responsible for taking the action necessary to protect Contractor supplies, materials and equipment, and the personal property of Contractor employees from loss, damage or theft. The Government assumes no responsibility for theft, damage, etc., of the above. All incidents of theft (or suspected theft) of contractor materials, supplies, or equipment from project lands shall be reported to the COR.








SECTION 01 42 00

SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS

11/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION




SECTION 01 42 00

SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS11/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in each section by document number, date and title. The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization (e.g. ASTM B564 Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes.

1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION

The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization, that information is also provided.

AACE INTERNATIONAL (AACE)1265 Suncrest Towne Centre DriveMorgantown, WV 26505-1876 USAPh: 304-296-8444Fax: 304-291-5728E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.aacei.org

AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)38800 Country Club DriveFarmington Hills, MI 48331-3439Ph: 248-848-3700Fax: 248-848-3701E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.concrete.org

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700Chicago, IL 60601-1802Ph: 312-670-2400Fax: 312-670-5403Bookstore: 800-644-2400E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.aisc.org

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)1800 East Oakton StreetDes Plaines, IL 60018Ph: 847-699-2929Internet: http://www.asse.org



AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)13301 NW 47 AveMiami, FL 33054

Ph: 888-WELDING, 305-824-1177, 305-826-6192Fax: 305-826-6195E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.aws.org

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)Two Park Avenue, M/S 10ENew York, NY 10016-5990Ph: 800-843-2763Fax: 973-882-1717E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.asme.org

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959Ph: 877-909-2786Internet: http://www.astm.org

CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)933 North Plum Grove RoadSchaumburg, IL 60173-4758Ph: 847-517-1200Fax: 847-517-1206Internet: http://www.crsi.org/

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)445 and 501 Hoes LanePiscataway, NJ 08854-4141Ph: 732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333Fax: 732-562-9667E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.ieee.org

INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)1901 North Moore StreetArlington, VA 22209-1762Ph: 703-525-1695Fax: 703-528-2148Internet: http://www.safetyequipment.org/

MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)2800 Ingleton AvenueBurnaby, BC CANADA V5C 6G7Ph: 1-888-674-8937Fax: 1-888-211-8708E-mail: [email protected] or [email protected]: http://www.mpi.net/

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)1 Batterymarch ParkQuincy, MA 02169-7471Ph: 617-770-3000Fax: 617-770-0700



Internet: http://www.nfpa.org

NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)Manager, Customer Service900 Spring StreetSilver Spring, MD 20910Ph: 240-485-1165E-mail: [email protected] (Jacques Jenkins)Internet: http://www.nrmca.org

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)40 24th Street, 6th FloorPittsburgh, PA 15222Ph: 412-281-2331Fax: 412-281-9992E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.sspc.org

U.S. ARMY (DA)U.S. Army Publishing DirectoratePh: 703-614-3634Internet: http://www.apd.army.mil

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)CRD-C DOCUMENTS available on Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=68Order Other Documents from:USACE Publications DepotAttn: CEHEC-IM-PD2803 52nd AvenueHyattsville, MD 20781-1102Ph: 301-394-0081Fax: 301-394-0084E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/ or http://www.hnc.usace.army.mil/Missions/Engineering/TECHINFO.aspx

U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)General Services Administration1275 First St. NEWashington, DC 20417Ph: 202-501-1231Internet: http://www.gsaelibrary.gsa.gov/ElibMain/home.doObtain documents from:Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST)Internet: https://assist.dla.mil/online/start/; account registration required

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)8601 Adelphi Road College Park, MD 20740-6001Ph: 866-272-6272Fax: 301-837-0483Internet: http://www.archives.govOrder documents from:Superintendent of Documents



U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO)710 North Capitol Street, NWWashington, DC 20401Ph: 202-512-1800Fax: 202-512-2104E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.gpoaccess.gov

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used






SECTION 01 45 00

QUALITY CONTROL

11/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 PAYMENT 1.3 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3.2 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL (CQC) PLAN 3.2.1 Content of the CQC Plan 3.2.2 Acceptance of Plan 3.2.3 Notification of Changes 3.3 COORDINATION MEETING 3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION 3.4.1 Personnel Requirements 3.4.2 CQC System Manager 3.4.3 CQC Personnel 3.4.4 Additional Requirement 3.4.5 Organizational Changes 3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES 3.6 CONTROL 3.6.1 Preparatory Phase 3.6.2 Initial Phase 3.6.3 Follow-up Phase 3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases 3.7 TESTS 3.7.1 Testing Procedure 3.7.2 Testing Laboratories 3.7.2.1 Capability Check 3.7.2.2 Capability Recheck 3.7.3 Onsite Laboratory 3.8 COMPLETION INSPECTION 3.8.1 Punch-Out Inspection 3.8.2 Pre-Final Inspection 3.8.3 Final Acceptance Inspection 3.9 DOCUMENTATION 3.10 REQUIRED FORMS 3.11 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE 3.12 PROGRESS AND WORK PHOTOGRAPHS 3.12.1 General 3.12.2 Photographs 3.12.3 Delinquent Photographs



3.13 DEFICIENCY TRACKING SYSTEM

ATTACHMENTS:

Sample forms




SECTION 01 45 00

QUALITY CONTROL11/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM D3740 (2012a) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction

ASTM E329 (2014a) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction

1.2 PAYMENT

Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an effective Quality Control program. Include all associated costs in the applicable Bid Schedule item.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan; G

SD-05 Design Data

Discipline-Specific Checklists

SD-06 Test Reports

Verification Statement

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Establish and maintain an effective quality control (QC) system that complies with the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction." QC consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with the Contract requirements. The QC system covers all construction design and construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and be keyed to the proposed construction design and construction sequence. The project superintendent will be held responsible for the quality of work and is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for non-compliance with the quality requirements specified in the Contract. In this context the highest level manager responsible for the overall construction activities at the site, including quality and production is the project superintendent. The project superintendent maintains a physical presence at the site at all times and is responsible for all construction and related activities at the site, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

3.2 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL (CQC) PLAN

Submit an outline for the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan no more than 30 days after contract award. Submit the full quality control plan so that Government approval is obtained no more than 60 days after issuance of the NTP. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of work to be started. Work outside of the accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional work.

3.2.1 Content of the CQC Plan

Include, as a minimum, the following to cover all design and construction construction-operations, both onsite and offsite, including work by subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents subcontractors designers of record, consultants, architect/engineers (AE), fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents:

a. A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff will implement the three phase control system for all aspects of the work specified. Include a CQC System Manager that reports to the project superintendent.

b. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a CQC function.

c. A copy of the letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager, including authority to stop work which is not in compliance with the Contract. Letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities, and responsibilities will be issued by the CQC System Manager. Furnish copies of these letters to the Contracting Officer.

d. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators,



suppliers, and purchasing agents subcontractors, designers of record, consultants, architect engineers (AE), offsite fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents, . These procedures must be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

e. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name, specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency, and person responsible for each test. (Laboratory facilities approved by the Contracting Officer are required to be used.)

f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests including documentation.

g. Procedures for tracking constructiondesign and construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. Establish verification procedures that identified deficiencies have been corrected.

h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.

i. A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, and is identified by different trades or disciplines, or it is work by the same trade in a different environment. Although each section of the specifications can generally be considered as a definable feature of work, there are frequently more than one definable features under a particular section. This list will be agreed upon during the coordination meeting.

3.2.2 Acceptance of Plan

Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of construction design and construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction design and construction. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in the Contractor Quality Control(CQC) Plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified.

3.2.3 Notification of Changes

After acceptance of the CQC Plan, notify the Contracting Officer in writing of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

3.3 COORDINATION MEETING

After the Preconstruction Conference, before the start of design or construction, and prior to acceptance by the Government of the CQC Plan, meet with the Contracting Officer at the Mutual Understanding Meeting to discuss the Contractor's quality control system. During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details must be developed, including the forms for recording the CQC operationsoperations, design activities, control activities, testing, administration of the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the interrelationship of Contractor's Management and control with the Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the Government, signed by both the Contractor and the



Contracting Officer and will become a part of the contract file. There can be occasions when subsequent conferences will be called by either party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures which can require corrective action by the Contractor.

3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

3.4.1 Personnel Requirements

The requirements for the CQC organization are a Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO), CQC System Manager, and sufficient number of additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and Contract compliance. The SSHO reports directly to a senior project (or corporate) official independent from the CQC System Manager. The SSHO will also serve as a member of the CQC Staff. Personnel identified in the technical provisions as requiring specialized skills to assure the required work is being performed properly will also be included as part of the CQC organization. The Contractor's CQC staff maintains a presence at the site at all times during progress of the work and has complete authority and responsibility to take any action necessary to ensure Contract compliance. Provide adequate office space, filing systems and other resources as necessary to maintain an effective and fully functional CQC organization. Promptly complete and furnish all letters, material submittals, shop drawing submittals, schedules and all other project documentation to the CQC organization. The CQC organization is responsible to maintain these documents and records at the site at all times, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

3.4.2 CQC System Manager

Identify as CQC System Manager an individual within the onsite work organization who is responsible for overall management of CQC and has the authority to act in all CQC matters for the Contractor. The CQC System Manager shall be a graduate engineer or a graduate of construction management, with a minimum of 5 years construction experience on construction similar to the contract, or a construction professional with a minimum of 10 years of field experience on mooring cell construction. This CQC System Manager shall be on the site at all times during construction and shall be employed by the prime Contractor. The CQC System Manager may not serve as the Safety and Health Manager and shall be assigned no separate duties as project superintendent. An alternate for the CQC System Manager shall be identified in the plan to serve in the event of the System Manager's absence. The requirements for the alternate shall be the same as for the designated CQC System Manager.

3.4.3 CQC Personnel

If needed to meet Quality Control objectives, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to provide specialized personnel to assist the CQC System Manager for the following areas: Civil, Structural, Environmental, Materials Technician and Submittals." These individuals shall be in addition to CQC personnel specified elsewhere in the contract. These individuals may be employees of the prime or subcontractor; shall be responsible to the CQC System Manager; shall be physically present at the construction site during work on their areas of responsibility; and shall have the necessary education and experience in accordance with the experience matrix listed herein. These individuals may perform other duties but must be allowed sufficient time to perform their assigned quality control duties as described in the Quality Control Plan. A single person may cover more than one area provided that they are qualified to



perform QC activities in each designated area and that workload allows.

Experience Matrix

Area Qualifications

Civil Graduate Civil Engineer or Construction Manager with 2 years experience in the type of work being performed on this project or technician with 5 yrs related experience

Structural Graduate Structural Engineer or Construction Manager with 2 yrs experience or person with 5 yrs related experience

Environmental Graduate Environmental Engineer with 3 yrs experience

Submittals Submittal Clerk with 1 yr experience

Concrete and Soils Materials Technician with 2 yrs experience for the appropriate area

3.4.4 Additional Requirement

In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the Contractor Quality Control(CQC) System Manager and Alternate CQC System Manager are required to have completed the Construction Quality Management (CQM) for Contractors course. If the CQC System Manager does not have a current certification, obtain the CQM for Contractors course certification within 90 days of award. This course is periodically offered by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command and the Army Corps of Engineers. Contact the Contracting Officer for information on the next scheduled class.

The Construction Quality Management Training certificate expires after 5 years. If the CQC System Manager's certificate has expired, retake the course to remain current.

3.4.5 Organizational Changes

Maintain the onsite CQC staff at the strength level needed by ongoing activities. The Contractor may adjust the onsite CQC staff as appropriate for work activities which may not require full time staff support as listed in paragraph 3.4.3. When it is necessary to make changes to the CQC staff, revise the CQC Plan to reflect the changes and submit the changes to the Government for acceptance in writing.

3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES

Submittals, if needed, must comply with the requirements in Section 01 33 00SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The CQC organization is responsible for certifying that all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the contract requirements.

3.6 CONTROL

CQC is the means by which the Contractor ensures that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers, complies with the



requirements of the contract. At least three phases of control are required to be conducted by the CQC System Manager for each definable feature of the construction work as follows:

3.6.1 Preparatory Phase

This phase is performed prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work, after all required plans/documents/materials are approved/accepted, and after copies are at the work site. This phase includes:

a. A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference codes, and standards. Make available during the preparatory inspection a copy of those sections of referenced codes and standards applicable to that portion of the work to be accomplished in the field. Maintain and make available in the field for use by Government personnel until final acceptance of the work.

b. Review of the contract drawings.

c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved.

d. Review of provisions that have been made to provide required control inspection and testing.

e. Examination of the work area to assure that all required preliminary work has been completed and is in compliance with the contract.

f. Examination of required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or submitted data, and are properly stored.

g. Review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure safety requirements are met.

h. Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work including repetitive deficiencies. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for that feature of work.

i. Check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be performed has been accepted by the Contracting Officer.

j. Discussion of the initial control phase.

k. The Government must be notified at least 48 hours in advance of beginning the preparatory control phase. Include a meeting conducted by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and attach to the daily CQC report. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet contract specifications.

3.6.2 Initial Phase

This phase is accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of work. Accomplish the following:



a. Check work to ensure that it is in full compliance with contract requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.

b. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance. Verify required control inspection and testing are in conpliance with the contract.

c. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels as appropriate.

d. Resolve all differences.

e. Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with each worker.

f. The Government must be notified at least 48 hours in advance of beginning the initial phase for definable feature of work. Prepare separate minutes of this phase by the CQC System Manager and attach to the daily CQC report. Indicate the exact location of initial phase for definable feature of work for future reference and comparison with follow-up phases.

g. The initial phase for definable feature of work should be repeated for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met.

3.6.3 Follow-up Phase

Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements, until completion of the particular feature of work. Record the checks in the CQC documentation. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional features of work which may be affected by the deficient work. Do not build upon nor conceal non-conforming work.

3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases

Conduct additional preparatory and initial phases on the same definable features of work if: the quality of on-going work is unacceptable; if there are changes in the applicable CQC staff, onsite production supervision or work crew; if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or if other problems develop.

3.7 TESTS

3.7.1 Testing Procedure

Perform specified or required tests to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements. Upon request, furnish to the Government duplicate samples of test specimens for possible testing by the Government. Testing includes operation and/or acceptance tests when specified. Procure the services of a Corps of Engineers approved testing laboratory or establish an approved testing laboratory at the project site. Perform the following activities and record and provide the following data:



a. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.

b. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and comply with testing standards.

c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.

d. Verify that recording forms and test identification control number system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been prepared.

e. Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing on the CQC report for the date taken. Specification paragraph reference, location where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying the test. If approved by the Contracting Officer, actual test reports are submitted later with a reference to the test number and date taken. Provide an information copy of tests performed by an offsite or commercial test facility directly to the Contracting Officer. Failure to submit timely test reports as stated results in nonpayment for related work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this Contract.

3.7.2 Testing Laboratories

All testing laboratories must be validated by the USACE Material Testing Center (MTC) for the tests to be performed. Information on the USACE MTC with web-links to both a list of validated testing laboratories and for the laboratory inspection request for can be found at: http://www.erdc.usace.army.mil/Media/Fact-Sheets/Fact-Sheet-Article-View/Article/476661/materials-testing-center

3.7.2.1 Capability Check

The Government reserves the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory for compliance with the standards set forth in the contract specifications and to check the laboratory technician's testing procedures and techniques. Laboratories utilized for testing soils, concrete, asphalt, and steel is required to meet criteria detailed in ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329.

3.7.2.2 Capability Recheck

If the selected laboratory fails the capability check, the Contractor will be assessed a charge of $1,000.00 to reimburse the Government for each succeeding recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently selected laboratory. Such costs will be deducted from the contract amount due the Contractor.

3.7.3 Onsite Laboratory

The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control testing laboratory and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no additional cost to the Government.



3.8 COMPLETION INSPECTION

3.8.1 Punch-Out Inspection

Conduct an inspection of the work by the CQC System Manager near the end of the work, or any increment of the work established by a time stated in the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Clause, "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work", or by the specifications. Prepare and include in the CQC documentation a punch list of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications, as required by paragraph DOCUMENTATION. Include within the list of deficiencies the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. Make a second inspection the CQC System Manager or staff to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, notify the Government that the facility is ready for the Government Pre-Final inspection.

3.8.2 Pre-Final Inspection

The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final Punch List may be developed as a result of this inspection. Ensure that all items on this list have been corrected before notifying the Government, so that a Final inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Correct any items noted on the Pre-Final inspection in a timely manner. These inspections and any deficiency corrections required by this paragraph need to be accomplished within the time slated for completion of the entire work or any particular increment of the work if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

3.8.3 Final Acceptance Inspection

The Contractor's Quality Control Inspection personnel, plus the superintendent or other primary management person, and the Contracting Officer's Representative is required to be in attendance at the final acceptance inspection. Additional Government personnel including, but not limited to, those from Base/Post Civil Facility Engineer user groups, and major commands can also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the Pre-Final inspection. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the final acceptance inspection and include the Contractor's assurance that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable, along with all remaining work performed under the Contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional inspection cost in accordance with the Contract clause titled "Inspection of Construction".

3.9 DOCUMENTATION

Maintain current records providing factual evidence that required quality control activities and/or tests have been performed. Include in these records the work of subcontractors and suppliers on an acceptable form that includes, as a minimum, the following information:

a. The name and area of responsibility of the Contractor/Subcontractor.

b. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair.



c. Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by whom. When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work performed each day by NAS activity number.

d. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to specifications/drawings requirements. Identify the control phase (Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List of deficiencies noted, along with corrective action.

e. Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings requirements.

f. Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with Contract reference, by whom, and action taken.

g. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.

h. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and instructions or corrective actions.

i. Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or specifications.

j. Verification Statement.

Indicate a description of trades working on the project; the number of personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays encountered. Cover both conforming and deficient features and include a statement that equipment and materials incorporated in the work and workmanship comply with the contract. Furnish the original and one copy of these records in report form to the Government daily within 24 hours after the date covered by the report, except that reports need not be submitted for days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, prepare and submit one report for every 7 days of no work and on the last day of a no work period. All calendar days must be accounted for throughout the life of the contract. The first report following a day of no work will be for that day only. Reports must be signed and dated by the CQC System Manager. Include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all subordinate quality control personnel within the CQC System Manager Report.

3.10 REQUIRED FORMS

Sample forms are enclosed at the end of Section 01 95 00 FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS.

3.11 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE

The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. Take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the



Contracting Officer can issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop orders will be made the subject of claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

3.12 PROGRESS AND WORK PHOTOGRAPHS

3.12.1 General

The Contractor shall, during the progress of the project, furnish the Government progress photographs to depict progress and work conditions of the site construction. The work photographs shall be taken at project initiation, at monthly intervals thereafter, and after completion of work.

3.12.2 Photographs

Photographs depicting progress shall be delivered to the Government along with each request for payment. Photographs depicting specific work, as specified above, shall be submitted with the monthly request for payment in the month which the work took place. The progress photographs shall be taken from not less than two positions for each work area, a minimum of 10 photographs shall be taken at different locations per month. They shall show, in as much as practical, work accomplished since the previous photographs. Project initiation photographs shall be taken from the same location and angle as the project completion photographs. The photographs shall be high resolution digital images saved as JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) files, or other acceptable compressed format. The resolution shall be no less than 1024 x 768 pixels. Each photograph shall be identified by the date and number of exposure, plus a brief description of the work photographed. The photographs shall be furnished to the Government on CD, by the time stipulated above. No separate payment shall be made for these services and all costs in connection thereto shall be considered incidental to costs of the representative work area.

3.12.3 Delinquent Photographs

For each month the Contractor fails to submit progress and work photographs, the Contracting Officer will retain $200.00 or 1 percent of the progress payment, whichever is greater, in accordance with Contract Clause PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS. Also, in accordance with Clause INSPECTION OF CONSTRUCTION, the Contracting Officer may, by contract or otherwise, have the progress and work photographs taken and modify the contract amount to reflect the charges for these photographs.

3.13 DEFICIENCY TRACKING SYSTEM

The Contractor shall maintain a cumulative list of deficiencies identified for the duration of the project. Deficiencies to be listed include those identified by the Contractor's Quality Control observations, test failures, Government oral observations and Notifications of Noncompliance. As a minimum, the list shall include the information contained in the Deficiency List attached at the end of this Section. A current copy of the list shall be maintained at the project site at all times and shall be made available for review by Government personnel. Copies of updated listings shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer at least every 30 days. Listings shall be submitted via the QCS-RMS interface as specified in Section 01 45 00.15, RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONTRACTOR MODE(RMS CM). Payment will be withheld for deficient work until it has been corrected.








SECTION 01 45 00.15

RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONTRACTOR MODE(RMS CM)

11/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 Contract Administration 1.2.1 Correspondence and Electronic Communications 1.2.2 Other Factors 1.3 RMS SOFTWARE 1.3.1 RMS CONTRACTOR'S MODE (CM) 1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1.5 RELATED INFORMATION 1.5.1 RMS User Guide 1.6 CONTRACT DATABASE 1.7 DATABASE MAINTENANCE 1.7.1 Administration 1.7.1.1 Contractor Information 1.7.1.2 Subcontractor Information 1.7.1.3 Correspondence 1.7.1.4 Equipment 1.7.1.5 Management Reporting 1.7.1.6 Request For Information (RFI) 1.7.2 Finances 1.7.2.1 Pay Activity Data 1.7.2.2 Payment Requests 1.7.3 Quality Control (QC) 1.7.3.1 Daily Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Reports. 1.7.3.2 Deficiency Tracking. 1.7.3.3 QC Requirements 1.7.3.4 Three-Phase Control Meetings 1.7.3.5 Labor and Equipment Hours 1.7.3.6 Accident/Safety Reporting 1.7.3.7 Features of Work 1.7.3.8 Hazard Analysis 1.7.4 Submittal Management 1.7.5 Schedule 1.7.6 Import/Export of Data 1.8 IMPLEMENTATION 1.9 MONTHLY COORDINATION MEETING 1.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION


SECTION 01 45 00.15 Page 1




SECTION 01 45 00.15

RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONTRACTOR MODE(RMS CM)11/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.



1.2 Contract Administration

The Government will use the Resident Management System (RMS) to assist in its monitoring and administration of this contract. The Contractor uses the Government-furnished Construction Contractor Mode of RMS, referred to as RMS CS, to record, maintain, and submit various information throughout the contract period. The Contractor mode user manuals, updates, and training information can be downloaded from the RMS web site (http://rms.usace.army.mil). The joint Government-Contractor use of RMS facilitates electronic exchange of information and overall management of the contract. QCS provides the means for the Contractor to input, track, and electronically share information with the Government in the following areas:

AdministrationFinancesQuality ControlSubmittal MonitoringSchedulingImport/Export of Data

1.2.1 Correspondence and Electronic Communications

For ease and speed of communications, exchange correspondence and other documents in electronic format to the maximum extent feasible between the Government and Contractor. Correspondence, pay requests and other documents comprising the official contract record are also be provided in paper format, with signatures and dates where necessary. Paper documents will govern, in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.

1.2.2 Other Factors

Particular attention is directed to Contract Clause, "Schedules for Construction Contracts", Contract Clause, "Payments", Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and Section 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL, which have a direct relationship to the reporting to be accomplished through RMS. Also, there is no separate payment for establishing and maintaining the RMS database; costs associated will be included in the contract pricing for



the work.

1.3 RMS SOFTWARE

RMS is a Windows-based program that can be run on a Windows based PC meeting the requirements as specified in Section 1.3. The Government will make available the RMS software to the Contractor after award of the construction contract. Prior to the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor will be responsible to download, install and use the latest version of the RMS software from the Government's RMS Internet Website. Any program updates of RMS will be made available to the Contractor via the Government RMS Website as the updates become available.

1.3.1 RMS CONTRACTOR'S MODE (CM)

RMS Contractor's Mode or RMS CM is the replacement for Quality Control System or QCS. The database remains the same. References to RMS in this specification includes RMS CM.

1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The following is the minimum system configuration required to run RMS and Contractor Mode:

Minimum RMS System Requirements

Hardware

Windows-based PC 1.5 GHz 2 core or higher processor

RAM 8 GB

Hard drive disk 200 GB space for sole use by the QCS system

Monitor Screen resolution 1366 x 768

Mouse or other pointing device

Windows compatible printer Laser printer must have 4 MB+ of RAM

Connection to the Internet minimum 4 Mbs per user

Software

MS Windows Windows 7 x 64 bit (RMS requires 64 bit O/S) or newer

Word Processing software Viewer for MS Word 2013, MS Excel 2013, or newer



Minimum RMS System Requirements

Microsoft.NET Framework Coordinate with Government QA Representative for free version required

Email MAPI compatible

Virus protection software Regularly upgraded with all issued manufacturer's updates and is able to detect most zero day viruses.

1.5 RELATED INFORMATION

1.5.1 RMS User Guide

After contract award, download instructions for the installation and use of RMS from the Government RMS Internet Website.

1.6 CONTRACT DATABASE

Prior to the pre-construction conference, the Government will provide the Contractor with basic contract award data to use for RMS. The Government will provide data updates to the Contractor as needed. These updates will generally consist of submittal reviews, correspondence status, Quality Assurance(QA) comments, and other administrative and QA data.

1.7 DATABASE MAINTENANCE

Establish, maintain, and update data in the RMS database throughout the duration of the contract at the Contractor's site office. Submit data updates to the Government (e.g., daily reports, submittals, RFI's, schedule updates, payment requests) using RMS. The RMS database typically includes current data on the following items:

1.7.1 Administration

1.7.1.1 Contractor Information

Contain within the database the Contractor's name, address, telephone numbers, management staff, and other required items. Within 7 calendar days of receipt of RMS software from the Government, deliver Contractor administrative data in electronic format in RMS.

1.7.1.2 Subcontractor Information

Contain within the database the name, trade, address, phone numbers, and other required information for all subcontractors. A subcontractor is listed separately for each trade to be performed. Assign each subcontractor/trade a unique Responsibility Code, provided in RMS. Within 7 calendar days of receipt of RMS software from the Government, deliver subcontractor administrative data in electronic format.



1.7.1.3 Correspondence

Identify all Contractor correspondence to the Government with a serial number. Prefix correspondence initiated by the Contractor's site office with "S". Prefix letters initiated by the Contractor's home (main) office with "H". Letters are numbered starting from 0001. (e.g., H-0001 or S-0001). The Government's letters to the Contractor will be prefixed with "C".

1.7.1.4 Equipment

Contain within the Contractor's RMS database a current list of equipment planned for use or being used on the jobsite, including the most recent and planned equipment inspection dates.

1.7.1.5 Management Reporting

RMS includes a number of reports that Contractor management can use to track the status of the project. The value of these reports is reflective of the quality of the data input, and is maintained in the various sections of RMS. Among these reports are: Progress Payment Request worksheet, Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) comments, Submittal Register Status, Three-Phase Control checklists.

1.7.1.6 Request For Information (RFI)

Exchange all Requests For Information (RFI) using the Built-in RFI generator and tracker in RMS.

1.7.2 Finances

1.7.2.1 Pay Activity Data

Include within the RMS database a list of pay activities that the Contractor develops in conjunction with the construction schedule. The sum of pay activities equals the total contract amount, including modifications. Each pay activity must be assigned to a Contract Line Item Number (CLIN). The sum of the activities equals the amount of each CLIN. The sum of all CLINs equals the contract amount.

1.7.2.2 Payment Requests

Prepare all progress payment requests using RMS. Complete the payment request worksheet, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice in RMS. Update the work completed under the contract, measured as percent or as specific quantities, at least monthly. After the update, generate a payment request report using RMS. Submit the payment request, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice with supporting data using RMS CM. If permitted by the Contracting Officer, email or a optical disc may be used. A signed paper copy of the approved payment request is also required and will govern in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.

1.7.3 Quality Control (QC)

RMS provides a means to track implementation of the 3-phase QC Control System, prepare daily reports, identify and track deficiencies, document progress of work, and support other Contractor QC requirements. Maintain this data on a daily basis. Entered data will automatically output to the



RMS generated daily report. Provide the Government a Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan within the time required in Section 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL. Within seven calendar days of Government acceptance, submit a RMS update reflecting the information contained in the accepted CQC Plan: schedule, pay activities, features of work, submittal register, QC requirements, and equipment list.

1.7.3.1 Daily Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Reports.

RMS includes the means to produce the Daily CQC Report. The Contractor can use other formats to record basic Quality Control(QC) data. However, the Daily CQC Report generated by RMS must be the Contractor's official report. Summarize data from any supplemental reports by the Contractor and consolidate onto the RMS-generated Daily CQC Report. Submit daily CQC Reports as required by Section 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL. Electronically submit reports to the Government within 24 hours after the date covered by the report. Also provide the Government a signed, printed copy of the daily CQC report.

1.7.3.2 Deficiency Tracking.

Use RMS to track deficiencies. Deficiencies identified by the Contractor will be numerically tracked using its Quality Control (QC) punch list items. Maintain a current log of its QC punch list items in the RMS database. The Government will log the deficiencies it has identified using its Quality Assurance (QA) punch list items. The Government's QA punch list items will be included in its export file to the Contractor. Regularly update the correction status of both QC and QA punch list items.

1.7.3.3 QC Requirements

Develop and maintain a complete list of QC testing and required structural and life safety special inspections required by the International Code Council (ICC), transferred and installed property, and user training requirements in RMS. Update data on these QC requirements as work progresses, and promptly provide the information to the Government via RMS.

1.7.3.4 Three-Phase Control Meetings

Maintain scheduled and actual dates and times of preparatory and initial control meetings in RMS.

1.7.3.5 Labor and Equipment Hours

Log labor and equipment exposure hours on a daily basis. The labor and equipment exposure data will be rolled up into a monthly exposure report.

1.7.3.6 Accident/Safety Reporting

The Government will issue safety comments, directions, or guidance whenever safety deficiencies are observed. The Government's safety comments will be provided via RMS CM. Regularly update the correction status of the safety comments. In addition, utilize RMS to advise the Government of any accidents occurring on the jobsite. A brief supplemental entry of an accident is not to be considered as a substitute for completion of mandatory reports, e.g., ENG Form 3394 and OSHA Form 300.



1.7.3.7 Features of Work

Include a complete list of the features of work in the RMS database. A feature of work is associated with multiple pay activities. However, each pay activity (see subparagraph "Pay Activity Data" of paragraph "Finances") will only be linked to a single feature of work.

1.7.3.8 Hazard Analysis

Use RMS CM to develop a hazard analysis for each feature of work included in the CQC Plan. The Activity Hazard Analysis will include information required by EM 385-1-1, paragraph 01.A.13.

1.7.4 Submittal Management

The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format. Thereafter, maintain a complete list of submittals, including completion of data columns. Dates when submittals are received and returned by the Government will be included. Use RMS CM to track and transmit submittals. ENG Form 4025, submittal transmittal form, and the submittal register update is produced using RMS. RMS will be used to update, store and exchange submittal registers and transmittals. In addition to requirements stated in specification 01 33 00, actual submittals are to be stored in RMS CM, with hard copies also provided. Exception will be where the Contracting Officer specifies only hard copies required, where size of document cannot be saved in RMS CM, and where samples, spare parts, color boards, and full size drawings are to be provided.

1.7.5 Schedule

Develop a construction schedule in accordance with Section 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Input and maintain in the RMS database the schedule either manually or by using the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF). Include with each pay request the updated schedule. Provide electronic copies of transmittals.

1.7.6 Import/Export of Data

RMS includes the ability to import schedule data using SDEF.

1.8 IMPLEMENTATION

Use of RMS CM as described in the preceding paragraphs is mandatory. Ensure that sufficient resources are available to maintain contract data within the RMS CM system. RMS CM is an integral part of the Contractor's management of quality control.

1.9 MONTHLY COORDINATION MEETING

Update the RMS CM database each workday. At least monthly, generate and submit a schedule update. At least one week prior to submittal, meet with the Government representative to review the planned progress payment data submission for errors and omissions.

Make required corrections prior to Government acceptance of the export file and progress payment request. Payment requests accompanied by incomplete or incorrect data submittals will not be accepted. The Government will not process progress payments until all required corrections are processed.



1.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE

The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the requirements of this specification. Take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used






SECTION 01 57 19

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

11/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 Environmental Pollution and Damage 1.2.2 Environmental Protection 1.2.3 Hazardous Debris 1.2.4 Hazardous Materials 1.2.5 Hazardous Waste 1.2.6 Sediment 1.2.7 Solid Waste 1.2.7.1 Debris 1.2.7.2 Non-Hazardous Waste 1.2.7.3 Scrap Metal 1.2.8 Waters of the United States 1.2.9 Wetlands 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Regulatory Notifications 1.5.2 Environmental Brief 1.5.3 Employee Training Records 1.5.4 Non-Compliance Notifications 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN 1.6.1 General Overview and Purpose 1.6.1.1 Descriptions 1.6.1.2 Duties 1.6.1.3 Procedures 1.6.1.4 Communications 1.6.1.5 Contact Information 1.6.2 General Site Information 1.6.2.1 Drawings 1.6.2.2 Work Area 1.6.2.2.1 Exclusion Zones 1.6.2.3 Documentation 1.6.3 Management of Natural Resources 1.6.4 Protection of Historical and Archaeological Resources 1.6.5 Stormwater Management and Control 1.6.6 Protection of the Environment from Waste Derived from

Contractor Operations 1.6.7 Prevention of Releases to the Environment 1.6.8 Regulatory Notification and Permits 1.6.9 Clean Air Act Compliance 1.6.9.1 Stationary Internal Combustion Engines 1.6.9.2 Air Pollution-engineering Processes 1.6.9.3 Compliant Materials



1.7 LICENSES AND PERMITS 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL RECORDS BINDER 1.9 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PERMIT 1.9.1 Solid Waste Management Report

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES 3.1.1 Flow Ways 3.2 STORMWATER 3.2.1 Work Area Limits 3.3 PROTECTION OF CULTURAL RESOURCES 3.3.1 Archaeological Resources 3.4 AIR RESOURCES 3.4.1 Burning 3.4.2 Dust Control 3.4.3 Odors 3.5 WASTE MINIMIZATION 3.5.1 Salvage, Reuse and Recycle 3.5.2 Nonhazardous Solid Waste Diversion Report 3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 3.6.1 Solid Waste Management 3.6.1.1 Control and Management of Solid Wastes 3.6.2 Control and Management of Hazardous Waste 3.6.3 Releases/Spills of Oil and Hazardous Substances 3.6.3.1 Response and Notifications 3.6.3.2 Clean Up 3.6.4 Mercury Materials 3.6.5 Wastewater 3.6.5.1 Disposal of wastewater must be as specified below. 3.6.5.1.1 Treatment 3.7 PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT 3.8 Used Oil Management 3.9 Oil Storage Including Fuel Tanks 3.10 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP




SECTION 01 57 19

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS11/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL (1987) Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual


29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

33 CFR 328 Definitions of Waters of the United States

40 CFR 60 Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources

40 CFR 63 National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants for Source Categories

40 CFR 64 Compliance Assurance Monitoring

40 CFR 241 Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste

40 CFR 243 Guidelines for the Storage and Collection of Residential, Commercial, and Institutional Solid Waste

40 CFR 258 Subtitle D Landfill Requirements

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions



40 CFR 279 Standards for the Management of Used Oil

40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification

40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan

40 CFR 300.125 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan - Notification and Communications

49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and Definitions

49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table, Special Provisions, Hazardous Materials Communications, Emergency Response Information, and Training Requirements

49 CFR 173 Shippers - General Requirements for Shipments and Packagings

PL 99-499 Emergency Planning and Community Right-To-Know Act of 1986 (EPCRA)

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Environmental Pollution and Damage

Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment aesthetically, culturally or historically.

1.2.2 Environmental Protection

Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants.

1.2.3 Hazardous Debris

As defined in paragraph SOLID WASTE, debris that contains listed hazardous waste (either on the debris surface, or in its interstices, such as pore structure) in accordance with 40 CFR 261. Hazardous debris also includes debris that exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 261.

1.2.4 Hazardous Materials

Hazardous materials as defined in EM 385-1-1 Section 6 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC AGENTS AND ENVIRONMENTS and 49 CFR 171, and listed in 49 CFR 172.

Hazardous material is any material that: Is regulated as a hazardous



material in accordance with 49 CFR 173; or requires a Safety Data Sheet (SDS) in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120; or during end use, treatment, handling, packaging, storage, transportation, or disposal meets or has components that meet or have potential to meet the definition of a hazardous waste as defined by 40 CFR 261 Subparts A, B, C, or D. Designation of a material by this definition, when separately regulated or controlled by other sections or directives, does not eliminate the need for adherence to that hazard-specific guidance which takes precedence over this section for "control" purposes. Such material includes ammunition, weapons, explosive actuated devices, propellants, pyrotechnics, chemical and biological warfare materials, medical and pharmaceutical supplies, medical waste and infectious materials, bulk fuels, radioactive materials, and other materials such as asbestos, mercury, and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

1.2.5 Hazardous Waste

Hazardous Waste is any material that meets the definition of a solid waste and exhibit a hazardous characteristic (ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, or toxicity) as specified in 40 CFR 261, Subpart C, or contains a listed hazardous waste as identified in 40 CFR 261, Subpart D.

1.2.6 Sediment

Sediment is soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff water or wind.

1.2.7 Solid Waste

Solid waste is a solid, liquid, semi-solid or contained gaseous waste. A solid waste can be a hazardous waste, non-hazardous waste, or non-Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) regulated waste. Types of solid waste typically generated at construction sites may include:

1.2.7.1 Debris

Debris is non-hazardous solid material generated during the construction, demolition, or renovation of a structure that exceeds 2.5-inch particle size that is: a manufactured object; plant or animal matter; or natural geologic material (for example, cobbles and boulders), broken or removed concrete, masonry, and rock asphalt paving; ceramics; roofing paper and shingles. Inert materials may be reinforced with or contain ferrous wire, rods, accessories and weldments. A mixture of debris and other material such as soil or sludge is also subject to regulation as debris if the mixture is comprised primarily of debris by volume, based on visual inspection.

1.2.7.2 Non-Hazardous Waste

Non-hazardous waste is waste that is excluded from, or does not meet, hazardous waste criteria in accordance with 40 CFR 263.

1.2.7.3 Scrap Metal

This includes scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such as reinforcing steel, structural shapes, pipe, and wire that are recovered or collected and disposed of as scrap. Scrap metal meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included.



1.2.8 Waters of the United States

Waters of the United States means Federally jurisdictional waters, including wetlands, that are subject to regulation under Section 404 of the Clean Water Act, as defined in 33 CFR 328, or navigable waters, as defined under the Rivers and Harbors Act.

1.2.9 Wetlands

Wetlands are those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or groundwater at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions. See WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Navigation Data Sheet G

Federal and State Regulatory Notifications and Permits; G

Environmental Protection Plan; G

Employee Training Records; G

Environmental Manager Qualifications; G

SD-07 Certificates

Employee Training Records; G

ECATTS Certificate Of Completion; G

Certificate of Competency


Assembled Employee Training Records; G

Regulatory Notifications; G

Contractor Certification

As-Built Topographic Survey

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

Provide and maintain, during the life of the contract, environmental protection as defined. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops during construction practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required to correct



conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or temporary environmental features associated with the project. Protect the environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work during the entire duration of this Contract. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to the environment, including water, air, solid waste, hazardous waste and substances, oily substances, and noise pollution.

Tests and procedures assessing whether construction operations comply with Applicable Environmental Laws may be required. Analytical work must be performed by qualified laboratories; and where required by law, the laboratories must be certified.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 Regulatory Notifications

Provide regulatory notification requirements in accordance with federal, state and local regulations. In cases where the Government will also provide public notification, coordinate with the Contracting Officer. Submit copies of regulatory notifications to the Contracting Officer at least 7 days prior to commencement of work activities. Typically, regulatory notifications must be provided for the following (this listing is not all-inclusive): demolition, renovation, NPDES defined site work, construction, removal or use of a permitted air emissions source, and remediation of controlled substances (asbestos, hazardous waste, lead paint).

1.5.2 Environmental Brief

Attend an environmental brief to be included in the preconstruction meeting. Provide the following information: types, quantities, and use of hazardous materials that will be brought onto the construction; and types and quantities of wastes/wastewater that may be generated during the Contract.

Prior to initiating any work on site, meet with the Contracting Officer and to discuss the proposed Environmental Protection Plan (EPP). Develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of environmental protection, including measures for protecting natural and cultural resources, required reports, required permits, permit requirements (such as mitigation measures), and other measures to be taken.

1.5.3 Employee Training Records

Prepare and maintain Employee Training Records throughout the term of the contract meeting applicable 40 CFR requirements. Provide Employee Training Records in the Environmental Records Binder. Ensure every employee completes a program of classroom instruction or on-the-job training that teaches them to perform their duties in a way that ensures compliance with federal, state and local regulatory requirements for RCRA Large Quantity Generator. Provide a Position Description for each employee, by subcontractor, based on the Davis-Bacon Wage Rate designation or other equivalent method, evaluating the employee's association with hazardous and regulated wastes. This Position Description will include training requirements as defined in 40 CFR 265 for a Large Quantity Generator facility. Submit these Assembled Employee Training Records to the Contracting Officer at the conclusion of the project, unless otherwise directed.



1.5.4 Non-Compliance Notifications

The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any observed noncompliance with federal, state or local environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's EPP. After receipt of such notice, inform the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time extensions will be granted or equitable adjustments allowed for any such suspensions. This is in addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or Federal Law.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN

The purpose of the EPP is to present an overview of known or potential environmental issues that must be considered and addressed during construction. Incorporate construction related objectives and targets from into the EPP. Include in the EPP measures for protecting natural and cultural resources, required reports, and other measures to be taken. Meet with the Contracting Officer or Contracting Officer Representative to discuss the EPP and develop a mutual understanding relative to the details for environmental protection including measures for protecting natural resources, required reports, and other measures to be taken. Submit an outline for the EPP no more than 30 days after contract award. Submit the full EPP so that Government approval is obtained no more than 60 days after issuance of the NTP. Revise the EPP throughout the project to include any reporting requirements, changes in site conditions, or contract modifications that change the project scope of work in a way that could have an environmental impact. No requirement in this section will relieve the Contractor of any applicable federal, state, and local environmental protection laws and regulations. During Construction, identify, implement, and submit for approval any additional requirements to be included in the EPP. Maintain the current version onsite.

The EPP includes, but is not limited to, the following elements:

1.6.1 General Overview and Purpose

1.6.1.1 Descriptions

A brief description of each specific plan required by environmental permit.

1.6.1.2 Duties

The duties and level of authority assigned to the person(s) on the job site who oversee environmental compliance, such as who is responsible for adherence to the EPP, who is responsible for spill cleanup and training personnel on spill response procedures, who is responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from the site (if applicable), and who is responsible for training the Contractor's environmental protection personnel.

1.6.1.3 Procedures

A copy of any standard or project-specific operating procedures that will be used to effectively manage and protect the environment on the project



site.

1.6.1.4 Communications

Communication and training procedures that will be used to convey environmental management requirements to Contractor employees and subcontractors.

1.6.1.5 Contact Information

Emergency contact information contact information (office phone number, cell phone number, and e-mail address).

1.6.2 General Site Information

1.6.2.1 Drawings

Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, jurisdictional wetlands, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, storm drains and conveyances, and stockpiles of excess soil or aggregate.

1.6.2.2 Work Area

Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and identify the areas of limited use or nonuse. Include measures for marking the limits of use areas, including methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas and methods to control runoff and to contain materials on site, and a traffic control plan.

1.6.2.2.1 Exclusion Zones

For both mooring cells, barge spudding is restricted to the downstream side with work barge facing southeast. If necessary, the contractor may spud in an alternate location for each mooring cell. Alternate location for each cell is located on the downstream side with work barge facing due east. All other areas will be excluded from spudding. A map of the inclusion areas has been provided.

1.6.2.3 Documentation

A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the Environmental Manager and stating that person is responsible for managing and implementing the Environmental Program as described in this contract. Include in this letter the Environmental Manager's authority to direct the removal and replacement of non-conforming work.

1.6.3 Management of Natural Resources

a. Land resources

b. Tree protection

c. Replacement of damaged landscape features

d. Temporary construction

e. Stream crossings



f. Fish and wildlife resources

g. Wetland areas

1.6.4 Protection of Historical and Archaeological Resources

a. Objectives

b. Methods

1.6.5 Stormwater Management and Control

a. Ground cover

b. Erodible soils

c. Temporary measures

(1) Structural Practices

(2) Temporary and permanent stabilization

d. Effective selection, implementation and maintenance of Best Management Practices (BMPs).

1.6.6 Protection of the Environment from Waste Derived from Contractor Operations

Control and disposal of solid and sanitary waste. Control and disposal of hazardous waste.

This item consist of the management procedures for hazardous waste to be generated. The elements of those procedures will coincide with the Hazardous Waste Management Plan. The Contracting Officer will provide a copy of the Hazardous Waste Management Plan. As a minimum, include the following:

a. List of the types of hazardous wastes expected to be generated

b. Procedures to ensure a written waste determination is made for appropriate wastes that are to be generated

c. Sampling/analysis plan, including laboratory method(s) that will be used for waste determinations and copies of relevant laboratory certifications

d. Methods and proposed locations for hazardous waste accumulation/storage (that is, in tanks or containers)

e. Management procedures for storage, labeling, transportation, and disposal of waste (treatment of waste is not allowed unless specifically noted)

f. Management procedures and regulatory documentation ensuring disposal of hazardous waste complies with Land Disposal Restrictions (40 CFR 268)

g. Management procedures for recyclable hazardous materials such as lead-acid batteries, used oil, and similar



h. Used oil management procedures in accordance with 40 CFR 279; Hazardous waste minimization procedures

i. Plans for the disposal of hazardous waste by permitted facilities; and Procedures to be employed to ensure required employee training records are maintained.

1.6.7 Prevention of Releases to the Environment

Procedures to prevent releases to the environment

Notifications in the event of a release to the environment

1.6.8 Regulatory Notification and Permits

List what notifications and permit applications must be made. Some permits require up to 180 days to obtain. Demonstrate that those permits have been obtained or applied for by including copies of applicable environmental permits. The EPP will not be approved until the permits have been obtained.

1.6.9 Clean Air Act Compliance

1.6.9.1 Stationary Internal Combustion Engines

Identify portable and stationary internal combustion engines that will be supplied, used or serviced. Comply with 40 CFR 60 Subpart IIII, 40 CFR 60 Subpart JJJJ, 40 CFR 63 Subpart ZZZZ, and local regulations as applicable. At minimum, include the make, model, serial number, manufacture date, size (engine brake horsepower), and EPA emission certification status of each engine. Maintain applicable records and log hours of operation and fuel use. Logs must include reasons for operation and delineate between emergency and non-emergency operation.

1.6.9.2 Air Pollution-engineering Processes

Identify planned air pollution-generating processes and management control measures (including, but not limited to, spray painting, abrasive blasting, demolition, material handling, fugitive dust, and fugitive emissions). Log hours of operations and track quantities of materials used.

1.6.9.3 Compliant Materials

Provide the Government a list of and SDSs for all hazardous materials proposed for use on site. Materials must be compliant with all Clean Air Act regulations for emissions including solvent and volatile organic compound contents, and applicable National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants requirements. The Government may alter or limit use of specific materials as needed to meet permit requirements for emissions.

1.7 LICENSES AND PERMITS

Obtain licenses and permits required for the construction of the project and in accordance with FAR 52.236-7 Permits and Responsibilities. Notify the Government of all general use permitted equipment the Contractor plans to use on site. This paragraph supplements the Contractor's responsibility under FAR 52.236-7 Permits and Responsibilities.



1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL RECORDS BINDER

Maintain on-site a separate three-ring Environmental Records Binder and submit at the completion of the project. Make separate parts within the binder that correspond to each submittal listed under paragraph CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS in this section.

1.9 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PERMIT

Provide the Contracting Officer with written notification of the quantity of anticipated solid waste or debris that is anticipated or estimated to be generated by construction. Include in the report the locations where various types of waste will be disposed or recycled. Include letters of acceptance from the receiving location or as applicable; submit one copy of the receiving location state and local Solid Waste Management Permit or license showing such agency's approval of the disposal plan before transporting wastes off Government property.

1.9.1 Solid Waste Management Report

Monthly, submit a solid waste disposal report to the Contracting Officer. For each waste, the report will state the classification (using the definitions provided in this section), amount, location, and name of the business receiving the solid waste.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

Minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage to fish, wildlife, and plants, including their habitats. Prior to the commencement of activities, consult COR, regarding rare species or sensitive habitats that need to be protected. The protection of rare, threatened, and endangered animal and plant species identified, including their habitats, is the Contractor's responsibility. The federally listed species are known and could be affected within the construction area. The proper individuals have have been coordinated with.

Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work. Confine construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated or specified.

3.1.1 Flow Ways

Do not alter water flows or otherwise significantly disturb the native habitat adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of fish and wildlife, except as specified and permitted.

3.2 STORMWATER

3.2.1 Work Area Limits

Mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this Contract prior to commencing construction activities. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work area that are not to be disturbed. Protect monuments and



markers before construction operations commence. Where construction operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers must be visible in the dark. Personnel must be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and protecting particular objects.

3.3 PROTECTION OF CULTURAL RESOURCES

3.3.1 Archaeological Resources

If, during excavation or other construction activities, any previously unidentified or unanticipated historical, archaeological, and cultural resources are discovered or found, activities that may damage or alter such resources will be suspended. Resources covered by this paragraph include, but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or burials; artifacts; shell, midden, bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rock or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed features; and any indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery or find, immediately notify the Contracting Officer so that the appropriate authorities may be notified and a determination made as to their significance and what, if any, special disposition of the finds should be made. Cease all activities that may result in impact to or the destruction of these resources. Secure the area and prevent employees or other persons from trespassing on, removing, or otherwise disturbing such resources. The Government retains ownership and control over archaeological resources.

3.4 AIR RESOURCES

Equipment operation, activities, or processes will be in accordance with 40 CFR 64 and state air emission and performance laws and standards.

3.4.1 Burning

Burning is prohibited .

3.4.2 Dust Control

Keep dust down at all times, including during nonworking periods. Dry power brooming will not be permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming. Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks, concrete, and bituminous concrete. Do not unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.

3.4.3 Odors

Control odors from construction activities. The odors must be in compliance with state regulations and local ordinances and may not constitute a health hazard.

3.5 WASTE MINIMIZATION

3.5.1 Salvage, Reuse and Recycle

Identify anticipated materials and waste for salvage, reuse, and recycling. Describe actions to promote material reuse, resale or recycling. To the extent practicable, all scrap metal must be sent for reuse or recycling and will not be disposed of in a landfill.



Include the name, physical address, and telephone number of the hauler, if transported by a franchised solid waste hauler. Include the destination and, unless exempted, provide a copy of the state or local permit (cover) or license for recycling.

3.5.2 Nonhazardous Solid Waste Diversion Report

Maintain an inventory of nonhazardous solid waste diversion and disposal of construction and demolition debris. Submit a report to the Contracting Officer on the first working day after each fiscal year quarter, starting the first quarter that nonhazardous solid waste has been generated. Include the following in the report:

Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Disposed

cubic yards, as appropriate

C&D Debris Recycled cubic yards, as appropriate

Total C&D Debris Generated cubic yards, as appropriate

Waste Sent to Waste-To-Energy Incineration Plant (This amount should not be included in the recycled amount)

cubic yards, as appropriate

3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

3.6.1 Solid Waste Management

3.6.1.1 Control and Management of Solid Wastes

Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers that are regularly emptied. Do not prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean. Employ segregation measures so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with non-hazardous solid waste. Solid waste disposal offsite must comply with most stringent local, state, and federal requirements, including 40 CFR 241, 40 CFR 243, and 40 CFR 258.

Manage hazardous material used in construction, including but not limited to, aerosol cans, waste paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated brushes, and used rags, in accordance with 49 CFR 173.

3.6.2 Control and Management of Hazardous Waste

Do not dispose of hazardous waste on Government property. Do not discharge any waste to a sanitary sewer, storm drain, or to surface waters or conduct waste treatment or disposal on Government property without written approval of the Contracting Officer.



3.6.3 Releases/Spills of Oil and Hazardous Substances

3.6.3.1 Response and Notifications

Exercise due diligence to prevent, contain, and respond to spills of hazardous material, hazardous substances, hazardous waste, sewage, regulated gas, petroleum, lubrication oil, and other substances regulated in accordance with 40 CFR 300. Maintain spill cleanup equipment and materials at the work site. In the event of a spill, take prompt, effective action to stop, contain, curtail, or otherwise limit the amount, duration, and severity of the spill/release. In the event of any releases of oil and hazardous substances, chemicals, or gases; immediately (within 15 minutes) notify the Fire Department, the Command Duty Officer, the Environmental Office, the Contracting Officer.

Submit verbal and written notifications as required by 40 CFR 300.125, 40 CFR 355, PL 99-499, state, local regulations and instructions. Provide copies of the written notification and documentation that a verbal notification was made within 20 days. Spill response must be in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and applicable state and local regulations. Contain and clean up these spills without cost to the Government.

3.6.3.2 Clean Up

Clean up hazardous and non-hazardous waste spills. Reimburse the Government for costs incurred including sample analysis materials, clothing, equipment, and labor if the Government will initiate its own spill cleanup procedures, for Contractor- responsible spills, when: Spill cleanup procedures have not begun within one hour of spill discovery/occurrence; or, in the Government's judgment, spill cleanup is inadequate and the spill remains a threat to human health or the environment.

3.6.4 Mercury Materials

Immediately report to the Environmental Office and the Contracting Officer instances of breakage or mercury spillage. Clean mercury spill area to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

Do not recycle a mercury spill cleanup; manage it as a hazardous waste for disposal.

3.6.5 Wastewater

3.6.5.1 Disposal of wastewater must be as specified below.

3.6.5.1.1 Treatment

Do not allow wastewater from construction activities, such as onsite material processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up, water used in concrete trucks, and forms to enter water ways or to be discharged prior to being treated to remove pollutants. Dispose of the construction- related waste water

3.7 PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT

Clean previously used construction equipment prior to bringing it onto the project site. Equipment must be free from soil residuals, egg deposits from plant pests, noxious weeds, and plant seeds. Consult with the U.S.



Department of Agriculture jurisdictional office for additional cleaning requirements.

3.8 Used Oil Management

Manage used oil generated on site in accordance with 40 CFR 279. Determine if any used oil generated while onsite exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste. Used oil containing 1,000 parts per million of solvents is considered a hazardous waste and disposed of at the Contractor's expense. Used oil mixed with a hazardous waste is also considered a hazardous waste. Dispose in accordance with paragraph HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL.

3.9 Oil Storage Including Fuel Tanks

Provide secondary containment and overfill protection for oil storage tanks. A berm used to provide secondary containment must be of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents of the tanks plus 5 inches freeboard for precipitation. Construct the berm to be impervious to oil for 72 hours that no discharge will permeate, drain, infiltrate, or otherwise escape before cleanup occurs. Use drip pans during oil transfer operations; adequate absorbent material must be onsite to clean up any spills and prevent releases to the environment. Cover tanks and drip pans during inclement weather. Provide procedures and equipment to prevent overfilling of tanks. If tanks and containers with an aggregate aboveground capacity greater than 1320 gallons will be used onsite (only containers with a capacity of 55 gallons or greater are counted), provide and implement a SPCC plan meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 112. Do not bring underground storage tanks to the for Contractor use during a project. Submit the SPCC plan to the Contracting Officer for approval.

Monitor and remove any rainwater that accumulates in open containment dikes or berms. Inspect the accumulated rainwater prior to draining from a containment dike to the environment, to determine there is no oil sheen present.

3.10 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP

Clean up areas used for construction in accordance with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". Unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Contracting Officer, remove traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of the work. Grade parking area and similar temporarily used areas to conform with surrounding contours.






SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 As-Built Drawings 1.2.2 Record Drawings 1.3 SOURCE DRAWING FILES 1.3.1 Terms and Conditions 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL 1.6 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT 1.6.1 Warranty Management Plan 1.6.2 Performance Bond 1.6.3 Pre-Warranty Conference 1.6.4 Contractor's Response to Construction Warranty Service

Requirements

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIALS 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2.2.1 Additional Drawings 2.2.1.1 Sheet Numbers and File Names

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 3.1.1 Markup Guidelines 3.1.2 As-Built Drawings Content 3.2 RECORD DRAWING FILES 3.2.1 Rename the CAD Drawing files 3.3 RECORD DRAWINGS 3.3.1 Final Record Drawing Package 3.4 CLEANUP




SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ERDC/ITL TR-12-1 (2015) A/E/C Graphics Standard, Release 2.0

ERDC/ITL TR-12-6 (2015) A/E/C CAD Standard - Release 6.0

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 As-Built Drawings

As-built drawings are developed and maintained by the Contractor and depict actual conditions, including deviations from the Contract Documents. These deviations and additions may result from coordination required by, but not limited to: contract modifications; official responses to Contractor submitted Requests for Information; direction from the Contracting Officer; designs which are the responsibility of the Contractor, and differing site conditions. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red-lined hard copies on site and or red-lined PDF files. These files serve as the basis for the creation of the record drawings.

1.2.2 Record Drawings

The record drawings are the final compilation of actual conditions reflected in the as-built drawings.

1.3 SOURCE DRAWING FILES

Request the full set of electronic drawings, in the source format, for Record Drawing preparation, after award and at least 30 days prior to required use.

1.3.1 Terms and Conditions

Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction drawings and data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the Government. The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor must, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable



attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use of these electronic files.

These electronic CAD drawing files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between the CAD files and the corresponding construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic CAD files, nor does it make representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractor hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the furnished Source drawing files, the signed and sealed construction documents govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict exists. Use of these Source Drawing files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or modifies these electronic source drawing files for use in producing construction drawings and data related to this contract, remove all previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and dates).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Warranty Management Plan


As-Built Drawings; G

Record Drawings; G

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

Additions and corrections to the contract drawings must be equal in quality and detail to that of the originals. Line colors, line weights, lettering, layering conventions, and symbols must conform to ERDC/ITL TR-12-6 and be the same as the original line colors, line weights, lettering, layering conventions, and symbols.

1.6 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT

1.6.1 Warranty Management Plan

Develop a warranty management plan which contains information relevant to Contract Clause 52.246-21 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION. Submit the warranty management plan at least 30 days before the planned pre-warranty conference. Include within the warranty management plan all required actions and documents to assure that the Government receives all warranties to which it is entitled. The plan must be in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to render it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair personnel, whether tradesmen, or of engineering background, not



necessarily familiar with this contract. The term "status" as indicated below must include due date and whether item has been submitted or was accomplished. Warranty information made available during the construction phase must be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate. Assemble approved information in a binder and turn over to the Government upon acceptance of the work. The construction warranty period will begin on the date of project acceptance and continue for the full product warranty period. A joint 4 month and 9 month warranty inspection will be conducted, measured from time of acceptance, by the Contractor, Contracting Officer and the Customer Representative. Include within the warranty management plan , but not limited to, the following:

a. Roles and responsibilities of all personnel associated with the warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers within the organizations of the Contractors, subcontractors, manufacturers or suppliers involved.

b. Furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location.

c. A list for each warranted item, feature of construction or system indicating:

(1) Name of item.

(2) Location where installed.

(3) Warranties and terms of warranty. Include one-year overall warranty of construction, including the starting date of warranty of construction. Items which have extended warranties must be indicated with separate warranty expiration dates.

(4) Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.

(5) Starting point and duration of warranty period.

(6) Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the warranty in force.

(7) Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for warranty service.

e. The plans for attendance at the 4 and 9 month post-construction warranty inspections conducted by the Government.

1.6.2 Performance Bond

The Performance Bond must remain effective throughout the construction period.

a. In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will have the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, will charge the remaining construction warranty funds of expenses incurred by the Government while performing the work, including, but not limited to administrative expenses.

b. In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the construction warranty work performed by the Government at the



Contractor's expense, the Contracting Officer will have the right to recoup expenses from the bonding company.

c. Following oral or written notification of required construction warranty repair work, respond in a timely manner. Written verification will follow oral instructions. Failure to respond will be cause for the Contracting Officer to proceed against the Contractor.

1.6.3 Pre-Warranty Conference

Prior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting Officer, meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual understanding with respect to the requirements of this section. Communication procedures for Contractor notification of construction warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary by the Contracting Officer for the execution of the construction warranty will be established/reviewed at this meeting. In connection with these requirements and at the time of the Contractor's quality control completion inspection, furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue construction warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This point of contact will be located within the local service area of the warranted construction, be continuously available, and be responsive to Government inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with other portions of this provision.

1.6.4 Contractor's Response to Construction Warranty Service Requirements

Following oral or written notification by the Contracting Officer, respond to construction warranty service requirements. Submit a report on any warranty item that has been repaired during the warranty period. Include within the report the cause of the problem, date reported, corrective action taken, and when the repair was completed. If the Contractor does not perform the construction warranty within the timeframe specified, the Government will perform the work and back charge the construction warranty payment item established.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIALS

The Government will provide an optical disc (CD or DVD) at the preconstruction conference that contains the following:

a. One set of "as-designed" electronic CAD files in the specified software and format revised to reflect all amendments and the final contract PDF drawings. The CAD files are provided to enable preparation of as-built or as-constructed drawings. If discrepancies exist between the CAD files and the contract PDF drawings, correct the CAD files to show the contract PDF drawings.

b. A submittal register data file in comma separated value (CSV) format for import into the Resident Management System (RMS).

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Prepare the CAD drawing files in MicroStation format compatible with the



Windows operating system.

2.2.1 Additional Drawings

If additional drawings are required, prepare them using the specified electronic file format applying the same graphic standards specified for original drawings, in accordnace with ERDC/ITL TR-12-6 and ERDC/ITL TR-12-1. The title block and drawing border to be used for any new final record drawings must be identical to that used on the contract drawings.

2.2.1.1 Sheet Numbers and File Names

If a sheet needs to be added between two sequential sheets, append a Supplemental Drawing Designator in accordance with ERDC/ITL TR-12-6 Adding a drawing sheet, and ERDC/ITL TR-12-1 Adding or deleting drawing sheets and index sheet procedures.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

Provide and maintain two black line print copies of the PDF contract drawings for As-Built Drawings.

3.1.1 Markup Guidelines

Make comments and markup the drawings complete without reference to letters, memos, or materials that are not part of the As-Built drawing. Show what was changed, how it was changed, where items(s) were relocated and change related details. These working as-built markup prints must be neat, legible and accurate as follows:

a. Use base colors of red, green, and blue. Color code for changes as follows:

(1) Special (Blue) - Items requiring special information, coordination, or special detailing or detailing notes.

(2) Deletions (Red) - Over-strike deleted graphic items (lines), lettering in notes and leaders.

(3) Additions (Green) - Added items, lettering in notes and leaders.

b. Provide a legend if colors other than the "base" colors of red, green, and blue are used.

c. Add and denote any additional equipment or material facilities, service lines, incorporated under As-Built Revisions if not already shown in legend.

d. Use frequent written explanations on markup drawings to describe changes. Do not totally rely on graphic means to convey the revision.

e. Use legible lettering and precise and clear digital values when marking prints. Clarify ambiguities concerning the nature and application of change involved.

f. Wherever a revision is made, also make changes to related section views, details, legend, profiles, plans and elevation views, schedules,



notes and call out designations, and mark accordingly to avoid conflicting data on all other sheets.

g. For deletions, cross out all features, data and captions that relate to that revision.

h. For changes on small-scale drawings and in restricted areas, provide large-scale inserts, with leaders to the applicable location.

i. Indicate one of the following when attaching a print or sketch to a markup print:

1) Add an entire drawing to contract drawings

2) Change the contract drawing to show

3) Provided for reference only to further detail the initial design.

j. Incorporate all shop and fabrication drawings into the markup drawings.

3.1.2 As-Built Drawings Content

Revise As-Built Drawings in accordance with ERDC/ITL TR-12-1 and ERDC/ITL TR-12-6. Provide two sets of paper copies from PDF drawings to show the as-built conditions by red-line process during the execution of the project. Keep these working as-built markup drawings current on a weekly basis and at least one set available on the jobsite at all times. Changes from the contract drawings which are made during construction or additional information which might be uncovered in the course of construction must be accurately and neatly recorded as they occur by means of details and notes. Submit the working as-built markup drawings for approval prior to submission of each monthly pay estimate. For failure to maintain the working and final record drawings as specified herein, the Contracting Officer will withhold 10 percent of the monthly progress payment until approval of updated drawings. Show on the as-built drawings, but not limited to, the following information:

a. The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility lines. In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances may be determined in the event the surface openings or indicators become covered over or obscured, show by offset dimensions to two permanently fixed surface features the end of each run including each change in direction on the record drawings. Locate valves, splice boxes and similar appurtenances by dimensioning along the utility run from a reference point. Also record the average depth below the surface of each run.

d. Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads, earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from contract plans.

e. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the Contractor; including but not limited to shop drawings, fabrication, erection, installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes, insulation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc.

f. The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or affected as part of the project construction.



g. Changes or Revisions which result from the final inspection.

h. Where contract drawings or specifications present options, show only the option selected for construction on the working as-built markup drawings.

i. If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, furnish a contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.

j. Modifications (include within change order price the cost to change working as-built markup drawings to reflect modifications).

k. Unusual or uncharted obstructions that are encountered in the contract work area during construction.

l. Location, extent, thickness, and size of stone protection particularly where it will be normally submerged by water.

3.2 RECORD DRAWING FILES

If additional drawings are required, prepare them using the specified electronic file format applying the same graphic standards specified for original drawings and ERDC/ITL TR-12-6 and ERDC/ITL TR-12-1. The title block and drawing border to be used for any new final record drawings must be identical to that used on the contract drawings. Accomplish additions and corrections to the contract drawings using CAD files. Provide all program files and hardware necessary to prepare final PDF record drawings. The Contracting Officer will review final PDF record drawings for accuracy and return them to the Contractor for required corrections, changes, additions, and deletions.

3.2.1 Rename the CAD Drawing files

Rename the CAD Drawing files using the contract number as the Project Code field,(e.g., W91238-15-C-10A-102.DGN) as instructed in the Pre-Construction conference. Use only those renamed files for the Marked-up changes. Make all changes on the layer/level as the original item.

a. For MicroStation files (DGN), enter all as-built delta changes and notations on:

- Level #63- Level/Layer Name contains: ANNO-REVS- Level/Layer Description: Revisions

c. When final revisions have been completed, show the wording "RECORD DRAWING AS-BUILTS" followed by the name of the Contractor in letters at least 3/16 inch high on the cover sheet drawing. Date RECORD DRAWING AS-BUILTS" drawing revisions in the revision block.

d. Within seven days after Government approval of all of the working record drawings for a phase of work, prepare the final CAD record drawings for that phase of work and submit PDF drawing files and two sets of prints for review and approval. The Government will promptly return one set of prints annotated with any necessary corrections. Within seven days revise the CAD files accordingly at no additional cost and submit one set of final prints for the completed phase of work



to the Government. Within 14 days of substantial completion of all phases of work, submit the final record drawing package for the entire project. Submit one set of electronic CAD files, and one set of the approved working record PDF files on optical disc with two sets of prints. The CAD files must be complete in all details and identical in form and function to the CAD drawing files supplied by the Government. Prepare MicroStation files for transmittal using the Packager (Archive). Make any transactions or adjustments necessary to accomplish this. The Government reserves the right to reject any drawing files it deems incompatible with the customer's CAD system. Paper prints, drawing files and storage media submitted will become the property of the Government upon final approval. Failure to submit final record PDF drawing files, CAD files and marked prints as specified will be cause for withholding any payment due under this contract. Approval and acceptance of final record drawings must be accomplished before final payment is made.

3.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

Prepare final record drawings after the completion of each definable feature of work as listed in the Contractor Quality Control Plan (Foundations, Utilities, Structural Steel, etc., as appropriate for the project). Transfer the changes from the approved working as-built markup drawings to the original electronic CAD drawing files. Modify the as-built CAD drawing files to correctly show the features of the project as-built by bringing the working CAD drawing set into agreement with approved working as-built markup drawings, and adding such additional drawings as may be necessary. Refer to ERDC/ITL TR-12-1 Chapter 11 Drawing Revisions. Jointly review the working as-built markup drawings with printouts from working as-built CAD drawing PDF files for accuracy and completeness. Monthly review of working as-built CAD drawing PDF file printouts must cover all sheets revised since the previous review. These PDF drawing files are part of the permanent records of this project. Any drawings damaged or lost must be satisfactorily replaced at no expense to the Government.

a. Drawing revisions (include within change order price the cost to change working and final record drawings to reflect revisions) and compliance with the following procedures.

(1) Follow directions in the revision for posting descriptive changes.

(2) The revision delta size must be 5/16 inch unless the area where the delta is to be placed is crowded. Use a smaller size delta for crowded areas.

(3) Place a revision delta at the location of each deletion.

(4) For new details or sections which are added to a drawing, place a revision delta by the detail or section title.

(5) For minor changes, place a revision delta by the area changed on the drawing (each location).

(6) For major changes to a drawing, place a revision delta by the title of the affected plan, section, or detail at each location.

(7) For changes to schedules or drawings, place a revision delta either by the schedule heading or by the change in the schedule.



3.3.1 Final Record Drawing Package

Submit the final record PDF and CAD drawings package for the entire project within 20 days of completion of each cell. Submit one set of TVA W Sheet size PDF and CAD files on optical disc, read-only memory (ROM), two sets of TVA W Sheet size prints and one set of the approved working record drawings. The package must be complete in all details and identical in form and function to the contract drawing files supplied by the Government.

3.4 CLEANUP

Leave premises "broom clean." Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Replace filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site.






SECTION 01 95 00

FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS

05/04

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS



ATTACHMENTS:

1. Contractor Performance Assessment Report (CPAR) Form

2. ENG Form 4025 Transmittal Form

3. Submittal Register

4. LRNP 385-1-2 Contractor Guidelines

5. USACE Nationwide Permit No. 25 Structural Discharges




SECTION 01 95 00

FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS05/04

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS

Listed below, and attached at the end of this section, are forms and attachments referred to in other parts of the set of technical specifications.

1. Contractor Performance Assessment Report (CPAR) Form. See Section

01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

2. ENG Form 4025 Transmittal Form. See Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

3. Submittal Register. See Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

4. LRNP 385-1-2 Contractor Guidelines. See Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

5. USACE Nationwide Permit No. 25 Structural Discharges. See Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.







DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION

05/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Demolition Plan 1.2.1.1 General Requirements 1.2.2 Aggregate Fill Plan 1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE 1.4 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Debris Control 1.7 PROTECTION 1.7.1 Protection of Personnel 1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIAL

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED 3.1.1 Structures 3.1.2 Structural Steel 3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL 3.2.1 Title to Materials 3.2.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment 3.3 CLEANUP 3.4 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS 3.4.1 Regulation of Removed Materials




SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION05/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)

ASSE/SAFE A10.6 (2006) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations




40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 Demolition Plan

Prepare a Demolition Plan and submit proposed salvage and demolition plan; as well as removal procedures for approval before work is started. Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress. Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1.

1.2.1.1 General Requirements

Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Contracting Officer and Lock Master. Remove rubbish and debris from the project site; do not allow accumulations inside or outside the structure. The work includes demolition, salvage of identified items and materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris. Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer. In the interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections.

1.2.2 Aggregate Fill Plan

Prepare and submit an Aggregate Fill Plan as required in Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL.



1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE

Take necessary precautions to minimize damage to mussels in the areas specified in drawing set. Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition, deconstruction, or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing such work.

1.4 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS

Areas in which the work is to be accomplished will be coordinated with the contracting officer and Lockmaster appropriately. Contractor shall exercise caution to not impact mussels in surrounding areas.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



Demolition Plan; G

Existing Conditions

SD-07 Certificates

Notification; G


Receipts


Submit timely notification of demolition or deconstruction projects to Federal, State, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Notify the Regional Office of the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) and the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSE/SAFE A10.6. Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified. Use of explosives will not be permitted.

1.6.1 Debris Control

Prevent the spread of debris to occupied portions of the water and avoid the creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area.



1.7 PROTECTION

1.7.1 Protection of Personnel

Before, during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the project site. No area, section, or component walls, or other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area.

1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Before beginning any demolition or deconstruction work, survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the elevation of the top, the location and extent of existing cracks, and other damage and description of surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIAL

a. Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for soils used as backfill material to fill voids, depressions or excavations resulting from demolition or deconstruction of structures.

b. In addition, fill material shall be free drained aggregate clear from roots and other organic matter, trash, debris, frozen materials, and stones larger than 6 inches in any dimension.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED

Inspect and evaluate existing structure onsite for material reuse. Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated, set aside, and prepared as specified, and stored or delivered to a collection point for reuse, remanufacture, recycling, or other disposal, as specified by COR or Lockmaster. Materials shall be designated for reuse onsite whenever possible.

3.1.1 Structures

a. Remove existing structures indicated to be removed.

b. Demolish or deconstruct structures in a systematic manner from the top of the structure to the ground.

c. Locate demolition and deconstruction equipment throughout the structure and remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors, or framing.



3.1.2 Structural Steel

Dismantle structural steel at field connections in a manner that will prevent bending or damage. Sheet piles, mooring rings and fenders will not be available for recycle and must be disposed of by Contractor.

3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL

3.2.1 Title to Materials

Title to materials resulting from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting Officer of the Contractor's demolition, deconstruction, and removal procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition and deconstruction. Except for aggregate materials and materials determined by contracting officer detailed in related sections, materials shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property. The Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited.

3.2.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment

Remove and store materials appropriately. Aggregate fill will be recycled and reused for the new cell.

3.3 CLEANUP

Remove and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS

3.4.1 Regulation of Removed Materials

Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other nonsalvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and local regulations as contractually specified. Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited.





DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

SECTION 03 31 01

CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

05/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.2 REFERENCES 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 Air Content 1.3.2 Slump Flow 1.3.3 Concrete Strength 1.3.4 Concrete Temperatures 1.3.5 Maximum Water-Cementitious Material (W/C) Ratio 1.3.6 Construction Tolerances 1.3.6.1 Mooring Cell Seals 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Cementitious Materials 2.1.1.1 Portland Cement 2.1.1.2 Fly Ash 2.1.1.3 Silica Fume 2.1.2 Aggregates 2.1.2.1 Aggregate Expansion 2.1.3 Chemical Admixtures 2.1.3.1 Air-Entraining Admixture 2.1.3.2 Accelerating Admixture 2.1.3.3 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture 2.1.3.3.1 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixtures 2.1.3.3.2 High-Range Water Reducing Admixture 2.1.3.4 Anti-washout Admixture 2.1.4 Water 2.2 EQUIPMENT 2.2.1 Concrete Productions 2.2.1.1 General Requirements 2.2.2 Conveying Equipment 2.2.2.1 Buckets 2.2.2.2 Transfer Hoppers 2.2.2.3 Trucks 2.2.2.4 Chutes 2.2.2.5 Belt Conveyors 2.2.2.6 Concrete Pumps

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.1 PREPARATION FOR PLACING 3.1.1 Dive Inspection 3.2 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE 3.2.1 Cold-Weather Requirements 3.2.2 Placing Concrete Underwater 3.2.3 Placing Flowable Concrete 3.2.4 Wet Curing 3.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 3.3.1 General 3.3.2 Testing and Inspection Requirements 3.3.2.1 Fine Aggregate 3.3.2.1.1 Grading 3.3.2.1.2 Corrective Action for Aggregate Grading 3.3.2.1.3 Moisture Content Testing 3.3.2.1.4 Moisture Content Corrective Action 3.3.2.2 Coarse Aggregate 3.3.2.2.1 Grading 3.3.2.2.2 Corrective Action for Grading 3.3.2.2.3 Coarse Aggregate Moisture Content 3.3.2.2.4 Coarse Aggregate Moisture Corrective Action 3.3.2.3 Quality of Aggregates 3.3.2.3.1 Aggregate Quality Tests 3.3.2.3.2 Corrective Action for Aggregate Quality 3.3.2.4 Batch-Plant Control 3.3.2.5 Concrete Mixture 3.3.2.5.1 Air Content Testing 3.3.2.5.2 Air Content Corrective Action 3.3.2.5.3 Slump Testing 3.3.2.5.4 Slump Corrective Action 3.3.2.5.5 Temperature 3.3.2.5.6 Compressive-Strength Specimens 3.3.2.6 Inspection Before Placing 3.3.2.7 Placing 3.3.2.7.1 Placing Inspection 3.3.2.7.2 Placing Corrective Action 3.3.2.8 Mixer Uniformity 3.3.2.8.1 Truck Mixers 3.3.2.9 Mixer Uniformity Corrective Action 3.3.3 Reports




SECTION 03 31 01

CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS05/14

PART 1 GENERAL


Measurement and payment will be made as stated in Section 01 22 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES.

1.2 REFERENCES


AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 301 (2016) Specifications for Structural Concrete

ACI 306R (2016) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting

ACI SP-15 (2011) Field Reference Manual: Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 301-05 with Selected ACI References


ASTM C1017/C1017M (2013; E 2015) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete

ASTM C1064/C1064M (2017) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C1077 (2017) Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

ASTM C117 (2017) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C123/C123M (2014) Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate

ASTM C1240 (2014) Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures

ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates



(Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C127 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

ASTM C128 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

ASTM C131/C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C142/C142M (2017) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates

ASTM C150/C150M (2017) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C1602/C1602M (2012) Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

ASTM C1611/C1611M (2014) Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete

ASTM C172/C172M (2017) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C231/C231M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C295/C295M (2012) Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete

ASTM C31/C31M (2017) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C33/C33M (2016) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C39/C39M (2017b) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens



ASTM C40/C40M (2016) Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete

ASTM C441 (2011) Effectiveness of Pozzolans or Ground Blast-Furnace Slag in Preventing Excessive Expansion of Concrete Due to the Alkali-Silica Reaction

ASTM C494/C494M (2017) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C535 (2016) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C566 (2013) Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

ASTM C618 (2017) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

ASTM C666/C666M (2015) Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing

ASTM C87/C87M (2017) Standard Test Method for Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar

ASTM C94/C94M (2017a) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM D75/D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates

CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

CRSI 10MSP (2009; 28th Ed) Manual of Standard Practice

NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)

NRMCA CPMB 100 (2000; R 2006) Concrete Plant Standards

NRMCA QC 3 (2015) Quality Control Manual: Section 3, Plant Certifications Checklist: Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities

NRMCA TMMB 100 (2001; R 2007) Truck Mixer, Agitator and Front Discharge Concrete Carrier Standards


COE CRD-C 104 (1980) Method of Calculation of the Fineness Modulus of Aggregate

COE CRD-C 114 (1997) Test Method for Soundness of



Aggregates by Freezing and Thawing of Concrete Specimens

COE CRD-C 130 (2001) Standard Recommended Practice for Estimating Scratch Hardness of Coarse Aggregate Particles

COE CRD-C 661 (2006) Specification for Antiwashout Admixtures for Concrete

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Design in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4. Submit concrete mix designs with the following properties.

1.3.1 Air Content

Air content between 4 and 7 percent as delivered to the forms and as determined by ASTM C231/C231M, except that when the nominal maximum-size coarse aggregate is 3/4 inch, between 4.5 and 7.5 percent.

1.3.2 Slump Flow

Concrete to be placed in underwater may contain a chemical admixture for use in producing flowing concrete in accordance with ASTM C1017/C1017M, the slump flow of the concrete when measured in accordance with ASTM C 1611 shall range from 22 to 28 inches, with no segregation.

1.3.3 Concrete Strength

Provide specified compressive strength f'c as follows:

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (PSI) STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE

4500 PSI @ 28 Days days Mooring Cell Concrete Seal

1.3.4 Concrete Temperatures

The temperature of the concrete as delivered must not exceed 90 degrees F. When the ambient temperature during placing is 40 degrees F or less, or is expected to be at any time within 8 hours after placing, the temperature of the concrete as delivered must be between 55 and 90 degrees F.

1.3.5 Maximum Water-Cementitious Material (W/C) Ratio

Maximum W/C allowed as follows:

WATER-CEMENT RATIO, BY MASS

STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE

0.45 Mooring Cell Concrete Seal

These W/C's may cause higher strengths than that required by paragraph CONCRETE STRENGTH.



1.3.6 Construction Tolerances

1.3.6.1 Mooring Cell Seals

Water Conveying:

Lateral alignment

Centerline alignment 1/2 inch

Inside dimensions 0.005 times inside dimension

Level alignment

Profile grade 1/2 inch

Cross-Sectional dimension

Mooring Cell Seals - 0 inch

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Concrete Mix Designs; GBatch Plant; GConcrete MixersConveying EquipmentPlacing EquipmentCementitious Materials, Admixtures, and Curing Compound; GNonshrink Grout

SD-05 Design Data

Underwater Concrete Placement Plan; GAggregate Gradation Submittal Plan; GMill Test ReportsTests and InspectionsQuality of Aggregates; GSD-06 Test Reports

Aggregates; GMill Test ReportsTests and InspectionsQuality of Aggregates; G

SD-07 Certificates

Concrete Field Testing TechniciansConcrete Construction Inspector (CCI)Cementitious Materials




The Government may sample and test aggregates and concrete to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples. Samples of aggregates will be obtained at the point of batching in accordance with ASTM D75/D75M. Concrete will be sampled in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Do not use a material until the Contracting Officer gives notice that test results are satisfactory. The individuals who sample and test concrete or the constituents of concrete as required in this specification must have demonstrated a knowledge and ability to perform the necessary test procedures equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians, Grade I. The individuals who perform the inspection of concrete construction must have demonstrated a knowledge and ability equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Construction Inspector (CCI). Submit statements that the concrete testing technicians and the concrete inspectors meet the specified requirements. Maintain a copy of ACI SP-15 and CRSI 10MSP at project site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Retest chemical admixtures that have been in storage at the project site for longer than 6 months or that have been subjected to freezing and reject if test results are not satisfactory. Chemical admixtures will be accepted based on compliance with the requirements of paragraph CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Submit mill test reports attesting that materials meet the requirements of the specification under which they are furnished. Certification and mill test reports must be from samples taken from the particular lot furnished. Certify the following for compliance with all specification requirements: Air-Entraining Admixture, Other Chemical Admixtures. Submit descriptive literature of the Nonshrink Grout proposed for use together with a certificate from the manufacturer stating that it is suitable for the application or exposure for which it is being considered.

2.1.1 Cementitious Materials

Cementitious materials are portland cement, portland cement in combination with pozzolan or portland cement in combination with silica fume conforming to appropriate specifications listed below.

2.1.1.1 Portland Cement

ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, except that the maximum amount of C3A in Type I cement is 15 percent including the heat of hydration at 7 days including false set requirements low alkali when used with aggregates listed at the end of this section which require it. In lieu of low-alkali cement, the Contractor may use a combination of portland cement that does not meet the low-alkali requirement with a pozzolan or GGBF slag provided the following requirement is met. The expansion of the proposed combination when tested in accordance with ASTM C441 must be equal to or less than the expansion of a low-alkali cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C150/C150M when tested in general conformance with ASTM C441. Run the expansion tests concurrently at an independent laboratory that is



nationally recognized to perform such tests. The Government reserves the right to confirm the test results and to adjust the percentage of pozzolan or slag in the combination to suit other requirements. white portland cement must meet the above requirements except that it may be Type I, Type II, or Type III low alkali. White Type III may be used only in specific areas of the structure, when approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.

2.1.1.2 Fly Ash

ASTM C618, Class F, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition must not exceed 3 percent. Class F fly ash for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 8 percent and a total equivalent alkali content less than 1.5 percent. Add with cement.

2.1.1.3 Silica Fume

Silica fume may be furnished as a dry, densified material or as a slurry. Silica fume, unprocessed, or before processing into a slurry or a densified material, must conform to ASTM C1240 with Table 2 and the Specific Surface Area and Uniformity Requirements in Table 4 invoked. Provide the services of a manufacturer's technical representative, experienced in mixture proportioning, placement procedures, and curing of concrete containing silica fume. Make the manufacturer's representative available for consultation by both the Contractor and the Government during mixture proportioning, planning, and production of silica-fume concrete and, onsite immediately prior to and during at least the first placement of concrete containing silica fume, and at other times if directed.

2.1.2 Aggregates

ASTM C33/C33M, except as modified herein. Furnish aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces from one source. Provide aggregates that do not contain any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement. Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM C33/C33M.

2.1.2.1 Aggregate Expansion

Provide fine and coarse aggregates with expansions less than 0.08 percent at 28 days after casting when testing in accordance with ASTM C1260. Should the test data indicate an expansion of 0.08 percent or greater, reject the aggregate(s) or perform additional testing using ASTM C1567 and using the proposed mix design. In this case, include the mix design low alkali portland cement and one of the following supplementary cementitious materials:

a. Fly ash or natural pozzolan at a minimum of total cementitious of

(1) 30 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 65 percent or more,(2) 25 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 70 percent or more,(3) 20 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 80 percent or more,(4) 15 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 90 percent or more.

b. Silica fume at a minimum of 7 percent of total cementitious.

If a combination of these materials is chosen, the minimum amount must be a linear combination of the minimum amounts above. Include these materials in sufficient proportion to show less than 0.08 percent expansion at 16 days after casting when tested in accordance with ASTM C1567.



2.1.3 Chemical Admixtures

Provide chemical admixtures, when required or permitted, that conform to the appropriate specification listed.

2.1.3.1 Air-Entraining Admixture

Conform to ASTM C260/C260M and consistently cause the concrete to have an air content in the specified ranges under field conditions.

2.1.3.2 Accelerating Admixture

Meet the requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type C or E, except that calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride is not permitted.

2.1.3.3 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture

2.1.3.3.1 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixtures

ASTM C494/C494M, Type A, B, or D, except that the 6-month and 1-year compressive strength tests are waived.

2.1.3.3.2 High-Range Water Reducing Admixture

ASTM C494/C494M, Type F or G except that the 6-month and 1-year strength requirements are waived. The admixture may be used only when approved by the Contracting Officer, such approval being contingent upon particular mixture control as described in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan.

2.1.3.4 Anti-washout Admixture

Anti-Washout admixture must be self leveling and self consolidating andmeet the requirements of COE CRD-C 661, and ASTM C494/C494M, Type S.

2.1.4 Water

Water may be chilled to address concrete heat concerns. Provide water for mixing and curing compliance with the requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M; free of injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali. Submit test report showing water complies with ASTM C1602/C1602M.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

Submit data on placing equipment and methods. The batching, mixing, conveying, and placing equipment must have a capacity of at least 50 cubicyards per hour.

2.2.1 Concrete Productions

2.2.1.1 General Requirements

Use batch-type equipment for producing concrete. Batch, mix and transportready-mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, except as otherwisespecified. Use truck mixers, agitators, and nonagitating transportingunits in compliance with NRMCA TMMB 100. Ready-mix plant equipment andfacilities must be certified in accordance with NRMCA QC 3. Furnishapproved batch tickets for each load of ready-mixed concrete. Producesite-mixed concrete in accordance with ACI 301, with plant



conforming to NRMCA CPMB 100.

2.2.2 Conveying Equipment

Submit data on the conveying equipment and methods for transporting, handling, and depositing the concrete. Conform the conveying equipment to the following requirements:

2.2.2.1 Buckets

The interior hopper slope shall be not less than 58 degrees from the horizontal, the minimum dimension of the clear gate opening shall be at least five times the nominal maximum-size aggregate, and the area of the gate opening shall not be less than 2 square feet. The maximum dimension of the gate opening shall not be greater than twice the minimum dimension. The bucket gates shall be essentially grout tight when closed and may be manually, pneumatically, or hydraulically operated except that buckets larger than 2 cubic yards shall not be manually operated. The design of the bucket shall provide means for positive regulation of the amount and rate of deposit of concrete in each dumping position.

2.2.2.2 Transfer Hoppers

Concrete may be charged into nonagitating hoppers for transfer to other conveying devices. Transfer hoppers must be capable of receiving concrete directly from delivery vehicles and have conical-shaped discharge features. Equip the transfer hopper with a hydraulically operated gate and with a means of external vibration to effect complete discharge.

2.2.2.3 Trucks

Truck mixers operating at agitating speed or truck agitators used for transporting plant-mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94/C94M.

2.2.2.4 Chutes

When concrete can be placed directly from a truck mixer, agitator, or nonagitating equipment, the chutes attached to this equipment by the manufacturer may be used. Use a discharge deflector when required by the Contracting Officer. Separate chutes and other similar equipment will not be permitted for conveying concrete.

2.2.2.5 Belt Conveyors

Design and operate to assure a uniform flow of concrete from mixer to final place of deposit without segregation of ingredients or loss of mortar and provide with positive means for preventing segregation of the concrete at the transfer points and the point of placing. Construct belt conveyors such that the idler spacing does not exceed 36 inches. The belt speed must be a minimum of 300 feet per minute and a maximum of 750 feet per minute. If concrete is to be placed through installed horizontal or sloping reinforcing bars, discharge the conveyor concrete into a pipe or elephant trunk that is long enough to extend through the reinforcing bars.

2.2.2.6 Concrete Pumps

Concrete may be conveyed by positive displacement pump when approved. The pumping equipment must be piston or squeeze pressure. The pipeline must be



rigid steel pipe or heavy-duty flexible hose. The inside diameter of the pipe must be at least three times the nominal maximum-size coarse aggregate in the concrete mixture to be pumped but not less than 4 inches. Do not use aluminum pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION FOR PLACING

3.1.1 Dive Inspection

A diver must inspect the interior of the cells immidiately prior to concrete placement. This includes but is not limited to:

(1) Visually inspect sheet pile interlocks and sheets to ensure no anomolies

(2) No voids are present anywhere inside the cell(3) Verify sheet pile depth is not hindered due to boulders or rocks.

3.2 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE

Handle concrete from mixer or transporting unit in a continuous manner until the approved unit of operation is completed. Provide adequate scaffolding, ramps and walkways so that personnel and equipment are not supported by in-place reinforcement. Placing will not be permitted when the sun, heat, wind, or limitations of facilities prevent proper consolidation, finishing and curing. Provide sufficient placing capacity so that concrete can be kept free of cold joints.

3.2.1 Cold-Weather Requirements

Submit a cold weather concreting plan showing compliance with the requirements contained in this paragraph and that comply with ACI 306R. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees F. The placement of concrete shall be halted whenever the river water temperature drops below 35 degrees F. Obtain approval prior to placing concrete when the river water and or ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. When the river water and or ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F the temperature of the concrete when placed shall be not less than 50 degrees F or more than 75 degrees F. Heating of the mixing water or aggregates may be necessary to regulate the concrete placing temperature. An accelerating admixture may be used when the ambient temperature is below 50 degrees F. Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 7 days after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period. Submit the proposed materials, methods, and protection of the underwater concrete for approval.

3.2.2 Placing Concrete Underwater

Deposit concrete in water by a tremie or concrete pump. The methods and equipment used will be subject to approval. Concrete buckets will not be permitted for underwater placement of concrete except to deliver concrete to the tremie. The tremie must be watertight and sufficiently large to permit a free flow of concrete. Keep the discharge end of the pump line or tremie shaft continuously submerged in the concrete. Effect the underwater seal in a manner that will not produce undue turbulence in the water. Keep the tremie shaft full of concrete to a point well above the water surface.



Proceed with placement without interruption until the concrete has been brought to the required height. Do not move the tremie horizontally during a placing operation, and provide a sufficient number of tremies so that the maximum horizontal flow is limited to 15 feet.Do not deposit concrete in running water or in water with a temperature below 35 degrees F.

3.2.3 Placing Flowable Concrete

If a plasticizing admixture conforming to ASTM C1017/C1017M is used or if aType F or G high range water reducing admixture is permitted to increasethe slump, the concrete must meet all requirements of paragraph SYSTEMDESCRIPTION. Use extreme care in conveying and placing the concrete toavoid segregation. No relaxation of requirements to accommodate flowableconcrete will be permitted.

3.2.4 Wet Curing

Wet cure marine concrete using ASTM C1602/C1602M compliant water for aminimum of 7 days. Do not allow construction loads to exceed thesuperimposed load which the structural member, with necessary supplementalsupport, is capable of carrying in current condition safely and withoutdamage. Leaving the forms in place for seven days is a suitable alternative to wet curing.

3.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

Submit test results and inspection reports, daily and weekly. Tests and inspect in accordance the following:

3.3.1 General

Perform the inspections and tests described below, and, based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action required and submit reports as required. When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the concreting operation is out of control, cease concrete placement. Locate the laboratory performing the tests on site and conform with ASTM C1077. The Government will inspect the laboratory, equipment, and test procedures prior to start of concreting operations and at least once per year thereafter for conformance with ASTM C1077.

3.3.2 Testing and Inspection Requirements

3.3.2.1 Fine Aggregate

3.3.2.1.1 Grading

At least once during each shift when the concrete plant is operating, perform one sieve analysis and fineness modulus determination in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M and COE CRD-C 104 for the fine aggregate or for each size range of fine aggregate if it is batched in more than one size or classification. The location at which samples are taken may be selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for control. However, the Contractor is responsible for delivering fine aggregate to the mixer within specification limits.

3.3.2.1.2 Corrective Action for Aggregate Grading

When the amount passing any sieve is outside the specification limits, immediately resample and retest the coarse aggregate. If the second sample



fails on any sieve, report that fact to the Contracting Officer. Where two consecutive averages of five tests are outside specification limits, consider the operation out of control and report to the Contracting Officer. Stop concreting and take immediate steps to correct the grading.

3.3.2.1.3 Moisture Content Testing

When in the opinion of the Contracting Officer the electric moisture meter is not operating satisfactorily, perform at least four tests for moisture content in accordance with ASTM C566 during each 8-hour period of mixing plant operation. Randomly select the times for the tests within the 8-hour period. Make an additional test whenever the slump is shown to be out of control or excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman. When the electric moisture meter is operating satisfactorily, make at least two direct measurements of moisture content per week to check the calibration of the meter. Use the results of tests for moisture content to adjust the added water in the control of the batch plant.

3.3.2.1.4 Moisture Content Corrective Action

Whenever the moisture content of the fine aggregate changes by 0.5 percent or more, adjust the scale settings for the fine-aggregate batcher and water batcher (directly or by means of a moisture compensation device) if necessary to maintain the specified slump.

3.3.2.2 Coarse Aggregate

3.3.2.2.1 Grading

At least once during each shift in which the concrete plant is operating, conduct a sieve analysis in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M for each size of coarse aggregate. The location at which samples are taken may be selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for production control. A test record of samples of aggregate taken at the same locations must show the results of the current test as well as the average results of the five most recent tests including the current test. The Contractor may adopt limits for control which are coarser than the specification limits for samples taken at locations other than as delivered to the mixer to allow for degradation during handling.

Contractor to provide a gradation for USACE approval. Contractor shall perform quality control on gradation.

3.3.2.2.2 Corrective Action for Grading

When the amount passing any sieve is outside the specification limits, immediately resample and retest the coarse aggregate. If the second sample fails on any sieve, report that fact to the Contracting Officer. Where two consecutive averages of five tests are outside specification limits, consider the operation out of control and report to the Contracting Officer. Stop concreting and take immediate steps to correct the grading.

3.3.2.2.3 Coarse Aggregate Moisture Content

Make a test for moisture content of each size group of coarse aggregate at least twice per week. When two consecutive readings for smallest size



coarse aggregate differ by more than 1.0 percent, increase frequency of testing to that specified above for fine aggregate, until the difference falls below 1.0 percent.

3.3.2.2.4 Coarse Aggregate Moisture Corrective Action

Whenever the moisture content of any size of coarse aggregate changes by 0.5 percent or more, adjust the scale setting for the coarse aggregate batcher and the water batcher if necessary to maintain the specified slump.

3.3.2.3 Quality of Aggregates

Submit aggregate quality tests at least 30 days prior to start of concrete placement.

3.3.2.3.1 Aggregate Quality Tests

Thirty days prior to the start of concrete placement, perform all tests for aggregate quality listed below.

FREQUENCY

PROPERTY TEST

Specific Gravity ASTM C127 ASTM C128

Absorption ASTM C127 ASTM C128

Durability Factor (using Procedure A)

COE CRD-C 114 ASTM C666/C666M

Clay Lumps and Friable Particles ASTM C142/C142M

Material Finer than No. 200 Sieve ASTM C117

Impurities ASTM C40/C40M ASTM C87/C87M

L.A. Abrasion ASTM C131/C131M ASTM C535

Soft and Friable (Scratch Hardness) COE CRD-C 130

Chert, less than 2.40 specific gravity

ASTM C123/C123M

Coal and Lignite, less than less than 2.00 specific gravity

ASTM C123/C123M



FREQUENCY

PROPERTY TEST

Petrographic Examination ASTM C295/C295M

3.3.2.3.2 Corrective Action for Aggregate Quality

If the result of a quality test fails to meet the requirements for quality immediately prior to start of concrete placement, change production procedures or materials and perform additional tests until the material meets the quality requirements prior to proceeding with either mixture proportioning studies or starting concrete placement. After concrete placement commences, whenever the result of a test for quality fails the requirements, immediately rerun the test. If the second test fails the quality requirement, report the fact to the Contracting Officer and take immediate steps to rectify the situation.

3.3.2.4 Batch-Plant Control

Continuously control the measurement of all constituent materials including cementitious materials, each size of aggregate, water, and admixtures. Adjust the aggregate weights and amount of added water as necessary to compensate for free moisture in the aggregates. Adjust the amount of air-entraining agent to control air content within specified limits. Prepare a report indicating type and source of cement used, type and source of pozzolan or slag used, amount and source of admixtures used, aggregate source, the required aggregate and water weights per cubic yard, amount of water as free moisture in each size of aggregate, and the batch aggregate and water weights per cubic yard for each class of concrete batched during plant operation.

3.3.2.5 Concrete Mixture

3.3.2.5.1 Air Content Testing

Conduct air content tests when test specimens are fabricated. In addition, make at least two tests for air content on randomly selected batches of each separate concrete mixture produced during each 8-hour period of concrete production. Make additional tests when excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman or Government quality assurance representative. Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M. Plot test results on control charts which at all times are readily available to the Government. Keep copies of the current control charts in the field, by the Contractor's quality control representatives, and plotted results as tests are made. When a single test result reaches either the upper or lower action limit immediately conduct a second test. Average the results of the two tests and use this average as the air content of the batch to plot on both the control chart for air content and the control chart for range, and for determining the need for any remedial action. Plot the result of each test, or average as noted in the previous sentence, on a separate chart for each mixture on which an "average line" is set at the midpoint of the specified air content range from paragraph AIR CONTENT. Set an upper warning limit and a lower warning limit line 1.0



percentage point above and below the average line. Set an upper action limit and a lower action limit line 1.5 percentage points above and below the average line, respectively. Plot the range between each two consecutive tests on a control chart for range where an upper warning limit is set at 2.0 percentage points and up upper action limit is set at 3.0 percentage points. Samples for air content may be taken at the mixer, however, the Contractor is responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated air content. If the materials or transportation methods cause air content loss between the mixer and the placement, take correlation samples at the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer and control the air content at the mixer as directed.

3.3.2.5.2 Air Content Corrective Action

Whenever points on the control chart for percent air reach either warning limit, immediately adjust the amount of air-entraining admixture batched. As soon as is practical after each adjustment, conduct another test to verify the result of the adjustment. Whenever a point on the control chart range reaches the warning limit, recalibrate the admixture dispenser to ensure that it is operating accurately and with good reproducibility. Whenever a point on either control chart reaches an action limit line, the air content is considered out of control and immediately halt the concreting operation until the air content is under control. Make additional air content tests when concreting is restarted.

3.3.2.5.3 Slump Testing

In addition to slump tests made when test specimens are fabricated, make at least four slump tests on randomly selected batches in accordance with ASTM C1611/C1611M for each separate concrete mixture produced during each 8-hour or less period of concrete production each day. Also, make additional tests when excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman or Government's quality assurance representative. Plot test results on control charts, which are readily available to the Government at all times. Keep copies of the current control charts in the field by the Contractor's quality control representatives and plot results as tests are made. When a single slump test reaches or goes beyond either the upper or lower action limit, immediately make a second test on the same batch of concrete. Average the results of the two tests and use this average as the slump of the batch to plot on both the control chart for percent air and the chart for range, and for determining the need for any remedial action. Set an upper warning limit at 1/2 inch below the maximum allowable slump on separate control charts for percent air used for each type of mixture as specified in paragraph SLUMP, and set an upper action limit line and lower action limit line at the maximum and minimum allowable slumps, respectively, as specified in the same paragraph. Plot the range between each consecutive slump test for each type of mixture on a single control chart for range on which an upper action limit is set at 2 inches. Take samples for slump at the mixer, however, the Contractor is responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated slump. If the materials or transportation methods cause slump loss between mixer and the placement, take correlation samples at the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer and control the slump at the mixer as directed.

3.3.2.5.4 Slump Corrective Action

Whenever points on the control chart for slump reach the upper warning



limit, immediately adjust the batch weights of water and fine aggregate. Make adjustments so that the total water content does not exceed that amount allowed by the maximum W/C specified, based upon aggregates which are in a saturated surface-dry condition. When a single slump reaches the upper or lower action limit, no further concrete may be delivered to the placing site until proper adjustments have been made. Immediately after each adjustment, make another test to verify the correctness of the adjustment. Whenever two consecutive slump tests, made during a period when there was no adjustment of batch weights, produce a point on the control chart for range at or above the upper action limit, immediately halt the concreting operation and take appropriate steps to bring the slump under control. Also, make additional slump tests as directed.

3.3.2.5.5 Temperature

Measure the temperature of the concrete when compressive strength specimens are fabricated. Measure in accordance with ASTM C1064/C1064M. Report the temperature along with the compressive strength data.

3.3.2.5.6 Compressive-Strength Specimens

Obtain samples and test concrete for quality control during placement. Sample fresh concrete for testing in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Make six test cylinders. Test concrete for compressive strength at 7 and 28 days for each design mix and for every 50 cubic yards of concrete. Minimum testing shall be conducted once per cell. Test two cylinders at 7 days; two cylinders at 28 days; and hold two cylinders in reserve. Prepare concrete test specimens in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. Perform compressive strength testing in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M.

3.3.2.6 Inspection Before Placing

Inspect foundation for quality in sufficient time prior to each concrete placement to certify to the Contracting Officer that they are ready to receive concrete. Report the results of each inspection in writing.

3.3.2.7 Placing

3.3.2.7.1 Placing Inspection

The placing foreman supervises all placing operations, determines that the correct quality of concrete or grout is placed in each location as directed and is for measuring and recording concrete temperatures and ambient temperature hourly during placing operations, weather conditions, time of placement, yardage placed, and method of placement.

3.3.2.7.2 Placing Corrective Action

The placing foreman must not permit batching and placing to begin until he has verified that an adequate number of vibrators in working order and with competent operators are available. Discontinue placing if any pile of concrete is inadequately consolidated. If any batch of concrete fails to meet the temperature requirements, take immediate steps to improve temperature controls.

3.3.2.8 Mixer Uniformity

Submit the results of the initial mixer uniformity tests, at least 5 days prior to the initiation of placing.



3.3.2.8.1 Truck Mixers

Prior to the start of concrete placing and at least once every 6 months when concrete is being placed, determine uniformity of concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. Randomly select the truck mixers for testing. When satisfactory performance is found in one truck mixer, the performance of mixers of substantially the same design and condition of the blades may be regarded as satisfactory.

3.3.2.9 Mixer Uniformity Corrective Action

When a mixer fails to meet mixer uniformity requirements, either remove the mixer from service on the work, increase the mixing time, change the batching sequence, reduce the batch size, or adjust the mixer until compliance is achieved.

3.3.3 Reports

Report all results of tests or inspections conducted informally as they are completed and in writing daily. Prepare a weekly report for the updating of control charts covering the entire period from the start of the construction season through the current week. During periods of cold-weather protection, make reports of pertinent temperatures daily. These requirements do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to report certain failures immediately as required in preceding paragraphs. Confirm such reports of failures and the action taken in writing in the routine reports. The Contracting Officer has the right to examine all test and inspection records.





DIVISION 05 - METALS

SECTION 05 50 13

MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS

05/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Fenders 2.1.2 Mooring Rings assembly 2.1.3 Structural Carbon Steel 2.1.4 Anchor Bolts 2.1.4.1 Toggle Bolts 2.1.4.2 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets 2.1.4.3 Washers 2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES 2.2.1 Shop Cleaning and Painting 2.2.1.1 Surface Preparation 2.2.1.2 Pretreatment, Priming and Painting 2.2.2 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.2 WORKMANSHIP 3.3 WELDING 3.4 FINISHES 3.4.1 Dissimilar Materials 3.4.2 Field Preparation 3.4.3 Environmental Conditions




SECTION 05 50 13

MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS05/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC 303 (2016) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016) Structural Welding Code - Steel

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B18.2.1 (2012; Errata 2013) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)

ASME B18.2.2 (2015) Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)

ASME B18.21.1 (2009; R 2016) Washers: Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series)


ASTM A123/A123M (2017) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A307 (2014; E 2017) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

ASTM A36/A36M (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM D1187/D1187M (1997; E 2011; R 2011) Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal

MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

MPI 79 (2012) Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for



Metal

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fabrication Drawings of

Embedded Angles and Plates, Installation Drawings; G

Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to structural system, and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303.

Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction.

1.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use procedures, materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove and replace damaged items with new items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Fenders

Fenders will be placed horizontally and vertically on the face of the mooring cells. Vertically, fenders at 10 feet in length are to be welded to the cell, refernce drawing. Horizontally, fenders will also be required. Refer to drawings for details.

2.1.2 Mooring Rings assembly

Mooring ring assemblies will be required per mooring cell. Refer to the drawing for assembly quanitity and additional information.

2.1.3 Structural Carbon Steel

ASTM A36/A36M.



2.1.4 Anchor Bolts

ASTM A307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and finish as the metal to which applied.

2.1.4.1 Toggle Bolts

ASME B18.2.1.

2.1.4.2 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets

ASME B18.2.2 or ASTM A307.

2.1.4.3 Washers

Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18.21.1.

2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES

2.2.1 Shop Cleaning and Painting

2.2.1.1 Surface Preparation

Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3. Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants with solvents until thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be free of dirt and grease. Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces, including contact surfaces within slip critical joints, but coat with rust preventative applied in the shop.

2.2.1.2 Pretreatment, Priming and Painting

Apply pretreatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

2.2.2 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces

Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES

Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework, such as miscellaneous mountings and frames. Provide with connections and welds.

Provide angles and plates, ASTM A36/A36M, for embedment as indicated. Galvanize embedded items exposed to the elements according to ASTM A123/A123M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Install items at locations indicated per drawings details, according to manufacturer's instructions. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied. Include materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work



is not definitely shown or specified. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause for rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness. Form joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water. Items listed below require additional procedures.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP

Provide miscellaneous metalwork that is well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and true curves. Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. Provide continuous welding along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Do not tack weld exposed connections of work in place and ground smooth. Provide a smooth finish on exposed surfaces of work in place and unless otherwise approved, flush exposed riveting. Mill joints where tight fits are required. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Accurately set work to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details.

3.3 WELDING

Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation. Type of welds are called out in the plans.

3.4 FINISHES

3.4.1 Dissimilar Materials

Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D1187/D1187M, asphalt-base emulsion.

3.4.2 Field Preparation

Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled, shall be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.

3.4.3 Environmental Conditions

Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting Officer.





DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

SECTION 09 97 02

PAINTING: HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES

11/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.2 REFERENCES 1.3 SAFETY, HEALTH, AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 Safety 1.3.1.1 Abrasive Blasting 1.3.1.2 Workers Other Than Blasters 1.3.1.3 Cleaning Before and After Abrasive Blasting 1.3.1.4 Paint Mixing 1.3.1.5 Paint Spraying 1.3.1.6 Explosion Proof Equipment 1.3.1.7 Further Precautions 1.3.1.8 Ignition Sources 1.3.2 Health 1.3.2.1 Medical Status 1.3.2.2 Change in Medical Status 1.3.3 Environmental Protection 1.3.3.1 Waste Classification, Handling, and Disposal 1.3.3.2 Containment 1.3.3.3 Visible Emissions Monitoring 1.3.3.4 PM-10 Monitoring 1.3.3.5 Water Quality 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS 1.5.1 Certified Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Professionals 1.5.2 Qualified Painting Contractor 1.5.3 Coating Thickness Gage Qualification 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SPECIAL PAINT FORMULAS 2.2 PAINT FORMULATIONS 2.2.1 Formula V-102e 2.2.2 Formula V-766e 2.2.3 Formula VZ-108d 2.3 INGREDIENTS FOR SPECIAL PAINT FORMULAS 2.3.1 Pigments and Suspending Agents 2.3.1.1 Aluminum Powder 2.3.1.2 Carbon Black 2.3.1.3 Zinc Dust 2.3.1.4 Iron Oxide 2.3.1.5 Titanium Dioxide 2.3.1.6 Suspending Agent E



2.3.1.7 Suspending Agent F 2.3.2 Resins, Plasticizer, and Catalyst 2.3.2.1 Plasticizer 2.3.2.2 Vinyl Resin, Type 3 2.3.2.3 Vinyl Resin, Type 4 2.3.2.4 Ortho-phosphoric Acid 2.3.3 Solvent and Thinners 2.3.3.1 Methanol 2.3.3.2 Methyl Ethyl Ketone 2.3.3.3 Methyl Isobutyl Ketone 2.3.3.4 Methyl Isoamyl Ketone 2.3.3.5 Toluene 2.3.4 Silane B 2.3.5 Propylene Oxide 2.4 TESTING 2.4.1 Chromatographic Analysis 2.4.2 Vinyl Paints

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING AND PREPARATION OF SURFACES TO BE PAINTED 3.1.1 General Requirements 3.2 PAINT APPLICATION 3.2.1 General 3.2.2 Mixing and Thinning 3.2.3 Time Between Surface Preparation and Painting 3.2.4 Method of Paint Application 3.2.5 Coverage and Film Thickness 3.2.5.1 Measurement on Ferrous Metal 3.2.6 Progress of Painting Work 3.2.7 Protection of Painted Surfaces 3.2.8 Vinyl Paints 3.2.8.1 General 3.2.8.2 Vinyl Zinc-Rich Primer 3.2.8.3 Vinyl Paints 3.3 PAINT SYSTEMS APPLICATION 3.3.1 Fabricated and Assembled Items 3.3.2 Surface Preparation 3.3.3 System No. 3-A-Z 3.3.4 Protection of Nonpainted Items and Cleanup 3.4 INSPECTION 3.5 PAINTING SCHEDULES




SECTION 09 97 02

PAINTING: HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES11/09

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 REFERENCES



ASTM D1045 (2014) Sampling and Testing Plasticizers Used in Plastics

ASTM D1152 (2006; R 2012) Methanol (Methyl Alcohol)

ASTM D1153 (2012) Methyl Isobutyl Ketone

ASTM D1200 (2010; R 2014) Viscosity by Ford Viscosity Cup

ASTM D1210 (2005; R 2014) Fineness of Dispersion of Pigment-Vehicle Systems by Hegman-Type Gage

ASTM D153 (1984; R 2014) Specific Gravity of Pigments

ASTM D281 (2012; R 2016) Standard Test Method for Oil Absorption of Pigments by Spatula Rub-Out

ASTM D2917 (2007; R 2013) Methyl Isoamyl Ketone

ASTM D3465 (2014) Standard Test Method for Purity of Monmeric Plasticizers by Gas Chromatography

ASTM D3721 (2005; R 2011) Synthetic Red Iron Oxide Pigment

ASTM D4417 (2014) Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel

ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment

ASTM D561 (1982; R 2014) Carbon Black Pigment for Paint

ASTM D7091 (2013) Standard Practice for



Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic, Nondestructive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals

ASTM D740 (2011) Methyl Ethyl Ketone

ASTM D841 (2017) Standard Specification for Nitration Grade Toluene

ASTM D962 (1981; R 2014) Aluminum Powder and Paste Pigments for Paints

ASTM E1347 (2006; R 2011) Color and Color Difference Measurement by Tristimulus (Filter) Colorimetry

INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)

ANSI/ISEA Z358.1 (2014) American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment

ANSI/ISEA Z87.1 (2015) Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6; TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10; TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14) National Electrical Code

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC Guide 6 (2015) Guide for Containing Surface Preparation Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations

SSPC QP 1 (2012; E 2012) Standard Procedure for Evaluating Painting Contractors (Field Application to Complex Industrial Structures)

SSPC SP 1 (2015) Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 3 (1982; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 5/NACE No. 1 (2007) White Metal Blast Cleaning



U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

FED-STD-595 (Rev C; Notice 1) Colors Used in



Government Procurement


29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection

29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces

29 CFR 1910.20 Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records

29 CFR 1910.94 Ventilation

29 CFR 1926.62 Lead

40 CFR 117 Determination of Reportable Quantities for Hazardous Substances

40 CFR 122 EPA Administered Permit Programs: The National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 262.22 Number of Copies

40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 302 Designation, Reportable Quantities, and Notification

40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification

40 CFR 50.6 National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air Quality Standards for PM10

40 CFR 58 Ambient Air Quality Surveillance

40 CFR 60 Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources

49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and Definitions

1.3 SAFETY, HEALTH, AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Perform work in accordance with all applicable health, safety, and environmental requirements as well as EM 385-1-1. Submit matters of interpretation of these requirements to the Contracting Officer for resolution before starting work. If no clarifications are sought, then the submittal is not necessary. Where the regulations conflict, the most stringent requirements shall apply. This paragraph supplements the health,



safety, and environmental requirements of EM 385-1-1.

1.3.1 Safety

Submit a Safety Plan in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 of EM 385-1-1, including, but not limited to, each of the topic areas listed in Appendix A therein and the specified requirements. Develop each topic in a concise manner to include management and operational aspects.

Painting must be completed in open air environments.

1.3.1.1 Abrasive Blasting

For abrasive blasting comply with the requirements in Section 06.H of EM 385-1-1. In addition to the requirements in Section 20 of EM 385-1-1, use hoses and hose connections of a type to prevent shock from static electricity. Hose lengths shall be joined together by approved couplings of a material and type designed to prevent erosion and weakening of the couplings. The couplings and nozzle attachments shall fit on the outside of the hose and designed to prevent accidental disengagement.

1.3.1.2 Workers Other Than Blasters

Protect workers, other than blasting operators working in close proximity to abrasive blasting operations, by utilizing MSHA/NIOSH-approved half-face or full-face air purifying respirators equipped with high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters, eye protection meeting or exceeding ANSI/ISEA Z87.1 and hearing protectors (ear plugs and/or ear muffs) providing a noise reduction rating of at least 20 dBA or as needed to provide adequate protection. Personal protective equipment shall be provided where required by 29 CFR 1910.146 and in accordance with 29 CFR 1910, Subpart I.

1.3.1.3 Cleaning Before and After Abrasive Blasting

Cleaning with compressed air shall be in accordance with Section 20.B.5 of EM 385-1-1 and personnel shall be protected as specified in 29 CFR 1910.134. When cleaning with solvents, provide ventilation where required by 29 CFR 1910.146 or where the concentration of solvent vapors exceeds 10 percent of the Lower Explosive Limit (LEL). Ventilation shall be in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.94, paragraph (c)(5). However, ventilation is not be a major concern due to the nature of the work being in an open environment.

1.3.1.4 Paint Mixing

Local exhaust ventilation shall be provided in the area where coatings are mixed. This ventilation system shall be capable of providing at least 100 linear fpm of capture velocity in the mixing zone. Exposure of skin and eyes shall be avoided by wearing appropriate chemically resistant gloves, apron, safety goggles, and face shields meeting or exceeding the requirements of ANSI/ISEA Z87.1. A combination unit, comprised of an eyewash and deluge shower, within close proximity to the mixing operation shall be provided in accordance with ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, paragraph (9). Individuals who have a history of, or develop a sensitivity to epoxy or polyurethane resin systems, shall not conduct work tasks or otherwise be exposed to such chemicals



1.3.1.5 Paint Spraying

Submit a comprehensive written Respiratory Protection Plan in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134, 29 CFR 1926.62, and Section 05.E of EM 385-1-1. During all spray painting operations, spray painters shall use approved SCBA or SAR (air line) respirators, unless valid air sampling has demonstrated contaminant levels to be consistently within concentrations that are compatible with air-purifying respirator Assigned Protection Factor (APF). Persons with facial hair that interferes with the sealing surface of the facepiece to face seal or interferes with respirator valve function shall not be allowed to perform work requiring respiratory protection. Air-purifying chemical cartridge/canister half- or full-facepiece respirators that have a particulate prefilter and are suitable for the specific type(s) of gas/vapor and particulate contaminant(s) may be used for nonconfined space painting, mixing, and cleaning (using solvents). These respirators may be used provided the measured or anticipated concentration of the contaminant(s) in the breathing zone of the exposed worker does not exceed the APF for the respirator and the gas/vapor has good warning properties or the respirator assembly is equipped with a NIOSH-approved end of service life indicator for the gas(es)/vapor anticipated or encountered. Where paint contains toxic elements that may become airborne during painting in nonconfined spaces, air-purifying half- and full-facepiece respirators or powered air-purifying respirators equipped with appropriate gas vapor cartridges, in combination with a high-efficiency filter, or an appropriate canister incorporating a high-efficiency filter, shall be used.

1.3.1.6 Explosion Proof Equipment

Electrical wiring, lights, and other equipment located in the paint spraying area shall be of the explosion proof type designed for operation in Class I, Division 1, Group D, hazardous locations as required by the NFPA 70. Electrical wiring, motors, and other equipment, outside of but within 20 feet of any spraying area, shall not spark and shall conform to the provisions for Class I, Division 2, Group D, hazardous locations. Electric motors used to drive exhaust fans shall not be placed inside spraying areas or ducts. Fan blades and portable air ducts shall be constructed of nonferrous materials. Motors and associated control equipment shall be properly maintained and grounded. The metallic parts of air-moving devices, spray guns, connecting tubing, and duct work shall be electrically bonded and the bonded assembly shall be grounded.

1.3.1.7 Further Precautions

a. Workers must wear nonsparking safety shoes.

b. Place and ground solvent drums, taken into the spraying area, on nonferrous surfaces. Maintain metallic bonding between containers and drums when materials are being transferred.

c. Inspect insulation on all power and lighting cables to ensure that the insulation is in excellent working condition and is free of all cracks and worn spots. Cables shall be further inspected to ensure that no connections are within 50 feet of the operation, that lines are not overloaded, and that they are suspended with sufficient slack to prevent undue stress or chafing.



1.3.1.8 Ignition Sources

Ignition sources, to include lighted cigarettes, cigars, pipes, matches, or cigarette lighters shall be prohibited in area of solvent cleaning, paint storage, paint mixing, or paint application.

1.3.2 Health

Prepare and submit a Medical Surveillance Plan and a statement from the examining physician indicating the name of each employee evaluated and any limitations which will preclude the employee from performing the work required. The statement shall include the date of the medical evaluation, the physician's name, signature, and telephone number..

1.3.2.1 Medical Status

Prior to the start of work, and annually thereafter, submit a Medical Status Report including records of medical tests. Medically evaluate all Contractor employees working with or around paint systems, thinners, blast media, those required to wear respiratory protective equipment, and those who will be exposed to high noise levels for the particular type of exposure they may encounter. Maintain medical records as required by 29 CFR 1910.20. The evaluation shall include:

a. Audiometric testing and evaluation of employees who will work in a noise environment with a time weighted average greater than or equal to 90 dBA.

b. Vision screening (employees who use full-facepiece respirators shall not wear contact lenses).

c. Medical evaluation shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

(1) Medical history including, but not limited to, alcohol use, with emphasis on liver, kidney, and pulmonary systems, and sensitivity to chemicals to be used on the job.

(2) General physical examination with emphasis on liver, kidney, and pulmonary system.

(3) Determination of the employee's physical and psychological ability to wear respiratory protective equipment and to perform job-related tasks.

(4) Determination of baseline values of biological indices for later comparison to changes associated with exposure to paint systems and thinners or blast media, which include: liver function tests to include SGOT, SGPT, GGPT, alkaline phosphates, bilirubin, complete urinalysis, EKG (employees over age 40), blood urea nitrogen (bun), serum creatinine, pulmonary function test, FVC, and FEV, chest x-ray (if medically indicated), blood lead and ZPP (for individuals where it is known there will be an exposure to materials containing lead), other criteria that may be deemed necessary by the Contractor's physician, and Physician's statements for individual employees that medical status would permit specific task performance.



1.3.2.2 Change in Medical Status

Any employee whose medical status has changed negatively due to work related chemical and/or physical agent exposure while working with or around paint systems and thinners, blast media, or other chemicals shall be evaluated by a physician, and obtain a physicians statement as described in paragraph MEDICAL STATUS prior to allowing the employee to return to those work tasks. Submit a Change in Medical Status Report detailing any negative changes in employee medical status and the results of the physicians reevaluation statement.

1.3.3 Environmental Protection

In addition to the requirements of Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, prepare an Environmental Protection Plan incorporating the submittals for Water Quality Plan, Containment Plan, Waste Disposal Plan, Soil Quality Plan, TSP Monitoring Plan, PM-10 Monitoring Plan, and Visible Emissions Monitoring Plan. The submitted plan shall also address all aspects of establishing and demarcating regulated areas, ventilation/containment system performance verification, and reporting of accidental releases. Comply with the following environmental protection criteria.

1.3.3.1 Waste Classification, Handling, and Disposal

Prepare and submit a Waste Disposal Plan in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR 261 and 40 CFR 262 including classification and handling. The Contractor is responsible for assuring the proper disposal of all hazardous and nonhazardous waste generated during the project. Waste generated from abrasive blasting, lead-containing paints with recyclable steel or iron abrasives shall be disposed of as a hazardous waste or shall be stabilized with proprietary pre-blast additives regardless of the results of 40 CFR 261 App II, Mtd 1311. Where stabilization is preferred, employ a proprietary blast additive, that has been blended with the blast media prior to use. Place hazardous waste in properly labeled, closed containers shielded adequately to prevent dispersion of the waste by wind or water. Any evidence of improper storage shall be cause for immediate shutdown of the project until corrective action is taken. Store nonhazardous waste in closed containers separate from hazardous waste storage areas. All hazardous waste shall be transported by a licensed transporter in accordance with 40 CFR 263 and 49 CFR 171, Subchapter C. Transport all nonhazardous waste in accordance with local regulations regarding waste transportation. In addition to the number of copies required by 40 CFR 262.22, supply one copy of each Waste Manifest to the Contracting Officer prior to transportation.

1.3.3.2 Containment

Prepare a Containment Plan for containing debris generated during blasting operations, including drawings, load-bearing capacity calculations, and wind load calculations. When the design is such that the spent abrasive is allowed to accumulate in quantities greater than 1,000 pounds, and/or impart a significant wind load on the structure, have the drawings approved by a registered structural engineer. The drawings and calculations shall be stamped with the engineer's seal. Also identify the type and placement of water booms, methods for anchoring the booms, and the procedures for removing debris. Contain debris generated during blasting operations in accordance with the requirements of SSPC Guide 6. Where required, verify the containment air pressure visually.



1.3.3.3 Visible Emissions Monitoring

Prepare a Visible Emissions Monitoring Plan including the provisions for halting work and correcting the containment in the event unacceptable emissions are observed. General statements shall not be used; specific methods, procedures, and details are required. Measure the time of emissions in accordance with 40 CFR 60, App A, Mtd 22. Monitor visible emissions for not less than 15 minutes of every hour. Calculate visible emissions for each hour by extrapolation. In no case shall visible emissions extend greater than 150 feet in any direction horizontal from the containment. In no case shall visible emissions be observed in the area of any sensitive receptor. If such emissions occur the job shall be shut down immediately and corrective action taken. Notify the foreman whenever visible emissions exceed 40 seconds in a 1 hour period. The foreman shall be notified and the job shall be shut down and corrective action taken whenever visible emissions exceed 75 seconds in a 2 hour period. Total observed visible emissions from the containment shall not exceed 1 percent of the work day. Shutdown and corrective action shall be taken to prevent such an occurrence. Document each time that the work is halted due to a violation of the visible emissions criteria. Documentation shall include the cause for shutdown and the corrective action taken to resolve the problem.

1.3.3.4 PM-10 Monitoring

Prepare and submit a PM-10 Monitoring Plan for monitoring emissions of particulate matter 10 microns or less in size (PM-10). The plan shall comply with the requirements of EPA regulation 40 CFR 50.6 and this paragraph. The plan shall also include provisions for halting work and correcting the containment in the event unacceptable emissions occur. The positioning of air monitoring equipment shall be in accordance with 40 CFR 58, App E, Subpart (8). In addition, a minimum of two PM-10 monitors shall be used at the project site, one down wind from the project and one in the area of greatest public access (e.g., playground, school yard, or homeowner's yard). When the project is in an area where there are critical receptors nearby, monitoring shall be conducted throughout the entire period that abrasive blasting and cleanup operations are performed. Otherwise, monitoring shall be performed 4 of the first 8 days and on a regular basis thereafter for a sum total of 25 percent of the time surface preparation and debris cleanup are performed. Failure to meet air quality regulatory limits shall require air monitoring to be repeated immediately after corrective actions have been taken. Also conduct preproject PM-10 monitoring. The preproject PM-10 monitoring shall be conducted a minimum of 2 weeks prior to the beginning of the project. The monitoring shall continue for a minimum of 3 days to establish background levels. Submit a PM-10 Test Report to the Contracting Officer within 48 hours, which includes:

a. Name and location of jobsite.

b. Date of monitoring.

c. Time of monitoring (i.e., time monitoring begins and ends each day).

d. Identification and serial number of monitoring units.

e. Drawing showing specific location of monitoring units.



f. Drawing showing specific location of paint removal operation and the method of removal or work activity being performed.

g. Wind direction and velocity.

h. A flow chart verifying the rate of air flow across the filter throughout the sampling period.

i. Name and address of laboratory.

j. Laboratory test procedure.

k. Laboratory test results.

l. Signatures of field and laboratory technicians conducting the work.

1.3.3.5 Water Quality

Prepare a Water Quality Plan for all job sites where lead-containing or other hazardous paint will be removed, including provisions for halting work if spills or emissions are observed entering into bodies of water or found in areas where storm water runoff could carry the debris into bodies of water or storm sewers. The plan shall also address cleanup and reporting procedures. Conduct operations in such a manner that lead-containing and other hazardous paint debris do not contaminate the water and so that NPDES permits in accordance with EPA regulation 40 CFR 122 are not required for the project. In the event that there are any releases of lead paint debris into the waterways, with reportable quantities of hazardous substances designated pursuant to Section 311 of the Clean Water Act, they shall be reported to the EPA in accordance with 40 CFR 117 and 40 CFR 355. Releases or spills that carry into waterways or storm sewers shall be thoroughly documented. The documentation shall include the time and location of the release, amount of material released, actions taken to clean up the debris, amount of debris recovered, and corrective action taken to avoid a reoccurrence. Releases shall also be reported to the Coast Guard and other state and local authorities as appropriate. If the release is equivalent to 10 pounds or more of lead-containing material in a 24-hour period, it is considered to be a reportable quantity under CERCLA. Comply with 40 CFR 302.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SD-03 Product Data

Inspections and Operations; G,

The Contractor shall document and submit records of inspections and operations performed. Submittals shall be made on a daily basis and shall include but are not limited to:

a. Inspections performed, including the area of the structure involved and the results of the inspection.



b. Surface preparation operations performed, including the area of the structure involved, the mode of preparation, the kinds of solvent, abrasive, or power tools employed, and whether contract requirements were met.

c. Thinning operations performed, including thinners used, batch numbers, and thinner/paint volume ratios.

d. Application operations performed, including the area of the structure involved, mode of application employed, ambient temperature, substrate temperature, dew point, relative humidity, type of paint with batch numbers, elapsed time between surface preparation and application, elapsed time for recoat, condition of underlying coat, number of coats applied, and if specified, measured dry film thickness or spreading rate of each new coating.

Qualifications; G,

The Contractor shall provide certification for all job sites. Submittal of the qualifications and experience of any additional qualified and competent persons the CIH, IH, CSP employs to provide on-site safety and health shall also be provided. Acceptance of this submission must be obtained prior to the submission of other required safety and health submittal items.

Safety and Health Provisions; G,

The requirements included in Section 01 of EM 385-1-1 shall be followed by the Contractor when preparing the Accident Prevention Plan. The plan shall be prepared for all sites and shall include, but is not limited to, each of the topic areas listed in Table 1-1 therein and the requirements of paragraph SAFETY AND HEALTH PROVISIONS; each topic shall be developed in a concise manner to include management and operational aspects.

Accident Prevention Plan; G

The Contractor shall submit an Accident Prevention Plan in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 of EM 385-1-1. The plan shall include, but is not limited to, each of the topic areas listed in Appendix A therein and the requirements of paragraph SAFETY AND HEALTH PROVISIONS; each topic shall be developed in a concise manner to include management and operational aspects.

Respiratory Protection Program; G

The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive written respiratory protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134, 29 CFR 1926.62, and Section 05.E of EM 385-1-1 and as required by subparagraph, Respirators.

Airborne Sampling Plan; G

The Contractor shall submit an Airborne Sampling Plan detailing the NIOSH Pub No. 98-119, Factory Mutual, or Underwriters Laboratories approved equipment, equipment calibration procedures, sampling methods, sampling to be performed, and analytical procedures to be used based on the type of work to be performed and anticipated toxic contaminants to be generated. The



Contractor shall include the name of the accredited laboratory, listed by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), to be used to conduct the analysis of any collected air samples.

Medical Surveillance Plan; G

The Contractor shall submit a Medical Surveillance Plan as required in paragraph MEDICAL STATUS and provide a statement from the examining physician indicating the name of each employee evaluated and any limitations which will preclude the employee from performing the work required. The statement shall include the date of the medical evaluation, the physician's name, signature, and telephone number.

Worker Protection Plan; G

The Contractor shall submit a Worker Protection Plan in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62. The plan shall address all necessary aspects of worker protection and shall include activities emitting lead, means to achieve compliance, alternative technologies considered, air monitoring program, implementation schedule, work practice program, administrative controls, multi-contractor site arrangements, and jobsite inspections.

Environmental Compliance Plan; G

The Contractor shall submit an Environmental Compliance Plan. The plan shall incorporate the submittals for Water Quality Plan, Ambient Air Monitoring Plan, and Visible Emissions Monitoring Plan. The submitted plan shall also address all aspects of establishing and demarcating regulated areas, ventilation/containment system performance verification, and reporting of accidental releases.

Waste Classification, Handling, and Disposal Plan; G

Wastes are likely to be generated during the preparation and painting processes. Therefore, the Contractor shall submit a Waste Classification, Handling, and Disposal Plan in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR 261 and 40 CFR 262 and paragraph Waste Classification, Handling, and Disposal.

Containment Plan; G

The Contractor shall submit a plan for containing paint overspray and/or debris generated during painting operations in accordance with the requirements of paragraph Containment. The plan shall include drawings, load-bearing capacity calculations, and wind load calculations. If site preparation involves the use of abrasive blasting material, and when the design is such that the spent abrasive is allowed to accumulate in quantities greater than 1,000 pounds, and/or impart a significant wind load on the structure, the Contractor shall have the drawings approved by a registered structural engineer. The drawings and calculations shall be stamped with the engineer's seal. The Contractor shall also identify the type and placement of water booms, methods for anchoring the booms, and the procedures for removing debris.

Visible Emissions Monitoring Plan; G



If surface preparation involves the use of abrasive blasting material, the Contractor shall submit a Visible Emissions Monitoring Plan in accordance with the paragraph Visible Emissions Monitoring. The plan shall include the provisions for halting work and correcting the containment in the event unacceptable emissions are observed. General statements shall not be used; specific methods, procedures, and details are required.

For all job sites where lead-containing or other hazardous paint is to be removed, the Contractor shall submit a Water Quality Plan. The plan shall include provisions for halting work if spills or emissions are observed entering into bodies of water or found in areas where storm water runoff could carry the debris into bodies of water or storm sewers. The plan shall also address cleanup and reporting procedures.

SD-04 Samples

Special Paint Formulas; G,

Samples of special paint formulas, listed in paragraph PAINT FORMULATIONS, shall be submitted. For all vinyl-type paints submitted for laboratory testing, separate 1/2 pint samples of ingredient raw materials shall be furnished. The ingredient samples shall be clearly identified by commercial name, trade designation, manufacturer, batch or lot number, and such other data as may be required.

Thinners; G,

Samples shall be submitted of the thinners which are those solvents used to reduce the viscosity of the paint. Material Safety Data Sheets must be maintained on site for any solvents brought on site and a copy provided in the appropriate pre-work documents.

SD-06 Test Reports

Specification and Proprietary Paints; G,

Federal, Military, Commercial Item Description, and SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings specification paints are those formulated to meet federal, military, government and industry specifications. When the required quantity of any type is 50 gallons or less, the Contractor can submit:

a. A certified test report showing the results of required tests made on the material and a statement that it meets all of the specification requirements.

b. A certified test report showing the results of required tests made on a previous batch of paint produced by the same firm using the same ingredients and formulation except for minor differences necessitated by a color change and a statement that the previous batch met all of the specification requirements. A report of tests on the proposed batch showing the following properties applicable to the material specifications shall be furnished: color, gloss, drying time, opacity, viscosity, weight



per gallon, and fineness of grind.

Airborne Sampling Report; G

The Contractor shall submit reports of airborne sampling tests as required by paragraph Airborne Sampling.

Inspection and Operation Records; G

The Contractor shall submit records of inspections and operations performed in accordance with paragraph INSPECTION. Submittals shall be made on a daily basis.

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications and Experience; G

The Contractor shall submit certification pursuant to paragraph QUALIFICATIONS for all job sites. Submittal of the qualifications and experience of any additional qualified and competent persons employed to provide on-site environmental, safety, and health shall also be provided. Acceptance of this submission must be obtained prior to the submission of other required environmental, safety, and health submittal items.

Qualified Painting Contractor; G

The Contractor shall submit a copy of their current SSPC QP 1 certification.

Qualified Coating Thickness Gages; G

Documentation of manufacturer's certification shall be submitted for all coating thickness gages.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

Qualifications and experience shall comply with the following.

1.5.1 Certified Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Professionals

Provide a certificate for each Certified EHS Professional; submit qualifications and experience of qualified and competent persons employed to provide preconstruction and onsite environmental, safety, and health services. Obtain acceptance of this submission prior to the submission of other required environmental, safety, and health submittal items. Utilize a qualified and competent person as defined in Section 01 of EM 385-1-1 to develop the required safety and health submittal and to provide onsite safety and health services during the contract period. The person shall be a Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH), an Industrial Hygienist (IH), or a Certified Safety Professional (CSP) with a minimum of 3 years of demonstrated experience in similar related work. The CIH, IH, or CSP may utilize other qualified and competent persons, as defined in EM 385-1-1, to conduct on-site safety and health activities as long as these persons have a minimum of 2 years of demonstrated experience in similar related work and are under the direct supervision of the CIH, IH, or CSP. For lead containing jobsites, the competent and qualified person shall have successfully completed an EPA or state accredited lead-based paint abatement Supervisor course specific to the work to be performed and shall



possess current and valid state and/or local government certification, as required.

1.5.2 Qualified Painting Contractor

Certified SSPC QP 1 Painting Contractor is not necessary. Painting activities will be performed in accordance with manufacturers requirements and shall be monitored by QA personnel, with the contractor submitting post application test data demonstrating the required thickness has been obtained..

1.5.3 Coating Thickness Gage Qualification

Submit Coating Thickness Gage Qualification documentation of manufacturer's certification for all coating thickness gages. Magnetic flux thickness gages as described in ASTM D7091 shall be used to make all coating thickness measurements on ferrous metal substrates. Eddy current thickness gages as described in ASTM D7091 shall be used to measure coating thickness on all nonferrous metal substrates. Gages shall have an accuracy of +/- 3 percent or better. Gages to be used on the job shall be certified by the manufacturer as meeting these requirements.


Process and package paints to ensure that within a period of one year from date of manufacture, they will not gel, liver, or thicken deleteriously, or form gas in the closed container. Paints, unless otherwise specified or permitted, shall be packaged in standard containers not larger than 5 gal, with removable friction or lug-type covers. Containers for vinyl-type paints shall be lined with a coating resistant to solvents in the formulations and capable of effectively isolating the paint from contact with the metal container. Each container of paint or separately packaged component thereof shall be labeled to indicate the purchaser's order number, date of manufacture, manufacturer's batch number, quantity, color, component identification and designated name, and formula or specification number of the paint together with special labeling instructions, when specified. Paint shall be delivered to the job in unbroken containers. Paints that can be harmed by exposure to cold weather shall be stored in ventilated, heated shelters. All paints shall be stored under cover from the elements and in locations free from sparks and flames.

1.7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

Paint shall be applied only to surfaces that are above the dew point temperature and that are completely free of moisture as determined by sight and touch. Paint shall not be applied to surfaces upon which there is detectable frost or ice. Except as otherwise specified, the temperature of the surfaces to be painted and of air in contact therewith shall be not less than 45 degrees F during paint application nor shall paint be applied if the surfaces can be expected to drop to 32 degrees F within 48 hours of application. During periods of inclement weather, painting may be continued by enclosing the surfaces and applying artificial heat, provided the minimum temperatures and surface dryness requirements prescribed previously are maintained. Paint shall not be applied to surfaces heated by direct sunlight or other sources to temperatures that will cause detrimental blistering, pinholing, or porosity of the film.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Submit Manufacturer's Product Data Sheet for each type of paint used; for products that are specified to be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, submit the paint manufacturer's product data sheet or other written instructions for those products.

2.1 SPECIAL PAINT FORMULAS

Special paints shall have the composition as indicated in the formulas listed herein. Where so specified, certain components of a paint formulation shall be packaged in separate containers for mixing on the job. If not specified or otherwise prescribed, the color shall be that naturally obtained from the required pigmentation.

2.2 PAINT FORMULATIONS

Special paint formulas shall comply with the following:

2.2.1 Formula V-102e

This formula is for Vinyl-Type Ready-Mixed Aluminum Impacted Immersion Coating, the ingredients are shown below.

INGREDIENTS PERCENT BY MASS

Vinyl Resin, Type 3 18.2

Aluminum Powder 8.3

Diisodecyl Phthalate 3.1

Methyl Isobutyl Ketone 33.8

Toluene 36.6

Total 100.0

a. The paint shall be furnished with the aluminum pigment mixed into the vehicle.

b. The viscosity of the paint shall be between 60 and 90 seconds using ASTM D1200 and a No. 4 Ford cup. The paint shall show the proper proportions of specified materials when analyzed by chromatographic and/or spectrophotometric methods.

2.2.2 Formula V-766e

This formula is for Vinyl-Type White (or Gray) Impacted Immersion Coating, the ingredients are shown below.







Titanium Dioxide and (for Gray) Carbon Black

13.0

Diisodecyl Phthalate 2.9

Methyl Isobutyl Ketone 32.0

Toluene 34.7

Ortho-Phosphoric Acid 0.2

Total 100.0

a. The dispersion of pigment shall be accomplished by means of pebble mills or other approved methods to produce a fineness of grind (ASTM D1210) of not less than 7 on the Hegman scale. Grinding in steel-lined or steel-ball mills will not be permitted. No grinding aids, antisettling agents, or any other materials except those shown in the formula will be permitted. The paint shall show the proper proportions of specified materials when analyzed by chromatographic and/or spectrophotometric methods. The ortho-phosphoric acid shall be measured accurately and diluted with at least four parts of ketone to one part of acid and it shall be slowly incorporated into the finished paint with constant and thorough agitation.

b. The viscosity of the paint shall be between 60 and 90 seconds using ASTM D1200 and a No. 4 Ford cup.

c. The white and gray paints shall be furnished in the volume ratio designated by the purchaser. The gray paint shall contain no pigments other than those specified. Enough carbon black shall be included to produce a dry paint film having a reflectance of 20-24 (ASTM E1347). The resulting gray color shall approximate color 26231 of FED-STD-595.

2.2.3 Formula VZ-108d

This formula is for Vinyl-Type Zinc-Rich Impacted Immersion Coating, the ingredients are shown below.

INGREDIENTS PERCENT BY WEIGHT POUNDS GALLONS

COMPONENT A

Vinyl Resin, Type 3 16.6 109.2 9.65

Methyl Isobutyl Ketone 80.6 528.9 79.30

Suspending Agent E 0.7 4.6 0.28

Suspending Agent F 0.4 2.7 0.19



INGREDIENTS PERCENT BY WEIGHT POUNDS GALLONS

Methanol 0.5 3.3 0.50

Synthetic Iron Oxide (Red)

1.2 7.9 0.19

Total 100.0 656.6 90.11

COMPONENT B

Silane B 100.0 4.1 0.47

COMPONENT C

Zinc Dust 100.0 550.0 9.42

Total Volume 100.00(mixed paint)

a. The iron oxide and suspending agents shall be dispersed into the vehicle (Component A) to a fineness of grind of not less than 4 on the Hegman scale (ASTM D1210). Grinding in steel-lined containers or using steel-grinding media shall not be permitted. The paint shall show the proper proportions of specified materials when analyzed by chromatographic and/or spectrophotometric methods. The sole purpose of the iron oxide pigment is to produce a contrasting color. A red iron oxide-type 3 vinyl resin vehicle paste may be used in place of dry iron oxide provided compensating adjustment are made in the additions of Type 3 resin and methyl isobutyl ketone. The finished product with zinc dust added shall produce a paint which has a red tone upon drying and a reflectance of not more than 16 (ASTM E1347).

b. VZ-108d paint shall be supplied as a kit. Each kit shall consist of 4.5 gal ( 33.1 pounds) of Component A in a 5-gallon lug closure type pail, 27.5 pounds of zinc dust (Component C) packaged in a 1-gal plastic pail, and 3 fluid ounces of silane (Component B) packaged in a glass bottle of suitable size having a polyethylene lined cap. The bottle of silane shall be placed on the zinc dust in the 1-gal pail. In addition to standard labeling requirements, each container of each component shall be properly identified as to component type and each container label of Component A shall carry the following: MIXING AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS: WARNING - THIS PAINT WILL NOT ADHERE TO STEEL SURFACES UNLESS COMPONENT B IS ADDED. Remove the 3 ounces of bottled Component B (silane) from the Component C (zinc dust) container and add to the base paint Component A) with thorough stirring. Then sift the zinc dust into the base paint while it is being vigorously agitated with a power-driven stirrer and continue the stirring until the zinc dust has been dispersed. The mixed paint shall at some point be strained through a 30-60 mesh screen to prevent zinc dust slugs from reaching the spray gun nozzle. The paint shall be stirred continuously during application at a rate that will prevent settling. If spraying is interrupted for longer than 15 minutes, the entire length of the hose shall be whipped vigorously to redisperse the zinc. If the spraying is to be interrupted for more than 1 hour, the hose shall be emptied by blowing the paint back into the paint pot. Thinning will not normally be required when ambient temperatures are below about 80 degrees F, but when the ambient and steel temperatures are higher, methyl isoamyl ketone (MIAK) or methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK) should be



used. If paint is kept covered at all times, its pot life will be about 8 days.

2.3 INGREDIENTS FOR SPECIAL PAINT FORMULAS

The following ingredient materials and thinners apply only to those special paints whose formulas are shown above in detail.

2.3.1 Pigments and Suspending Agents

2.3.1.1 Aluminum Powder

For vinyl paint aluminum powder shall conform to ASTM D962, Type 1, Class B.

2.3.1.2 Carbon Black

Carbon black shall conform to ASTM D561, Type I or II.

2.3.1.3 Zinc Dust

Zinc dust pigment shall conform to ASTM D520, Type II.

2.3.1.4 Iron Oxide

Iron oxide, (Dry) synthetic (red), shall conform to ASTM D3721. In addition, the pigment shall have a maximum oil absorption of 24 and a specific gravity of 4.90 to 5.20 when tested in accordance with ASTM D281 and ASTM D153, Method A, respectively. When the pigment is dispersed into specified vinyl paint formulation, the paint shall have color approximating FED-STD-595 color 10076 (dark red paint), and shall show no evidence of incompatibility or reaction between pigment and other components after 6 months storage.

2.3.1.5 Titanium Dioxide

Titanium dioxide in vinyl paint Formula V-766e shall be one of the following: Kronos 2160 or 2101, Kronos, Inc.; Ti-Pure R-960, E.I. Dupont DeNemours and Co., Inc.

2.3.1.6 Suspending Agent E

Suspending Agent E shall be a light cream colored finely divided powder having a specific gravity of 2 to 2.3. It shall be an organic derivative of magnesium aluminum silicate mineral capable of minimizing the tendency of zinc dust to settle hard without increasing the viscosity of the paint appreciably. M-P-A-14, produced by Elementis Specialties, has these properties.

2.3.1.7 Suspending Agent F

Suspending Agent F shall be a light cream colored finely divided powder having a specific gravity of approximately 1.8. It shall be an organic derivative of a special montmorillonite (trialkylaryl ammonium hectorite). Bentone 27, produced by Elementis Specialties, has these properties.



2.3.2 Resins, Plasticizer, and Catalyst

2.3.2.1 Plasticizer

The plasticizer shall be either Di 2-propyl Heptyl Phthalate (DPHP) or Diisodecyl Phthalate (DIDP). DPHP shall have an ester content of not less than 99.5 percent (ASTM D3465), shall contain not more than 0.1 percent water, and shall have an acid number (ASTM D1045) of not more than 0.07.DIDP shall have a purity of not less than 99.0 percent, shall contain not more than 0.1 percent water, and shall have an acid number (ASTM D1045) of not more than 0.10.

2.3.2.2 Vinyl Resin, Type 3

Vinyl resin, Type 3, shall be a vinyl chloride-acetate copolymer of medium average molecular weight produced by a solution polymerization process and shall contain 85 +/- 1.0 percent vinyl chloride and 15 +/- 1.0 percent vinyl acetate by weight. The resin shall have film-forming properties and shall, in specified formulations, produce results equal to Vinnol H 15/50, as manufactured by Wacker Chemie AG.

2.3.2.3 Vinyl Resin, Type 4

Vinyl resin, Type 4, shall be a copolymer of the vinyl chloride-acetate type produced by a solution polymerization process, shall contain (by weight) 1 percent interpolymerized dicarbonic acid, 84 +/- 1.0 percent vinyl chloride, and 15 +/- 1.0 percent vinyl acetate. The resin shall have film-forming properties and shall, in the specified formulations, produce results equal to Vinnol H 15/45 M, as manufactured by Wacker Chemie AG.

2.3.2.4 Ortho-phosphoric Acid

Ortho-phosphoric acid shall be a chemically pure 85-percent grade.

2.3.3 Solvent and Thinners

2.3.3.1 Methanol

Methanol (methyl alcohol) shall conform to ASTM D1152.

2.3.3.2 Methyl Ethyl Ketone

Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) shall conform to ASTM D740.

2.3.3.3 Methyl Isobutyl Ketone

Methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK) shall conform to ASTM D1153.

2.3.3.4 Methyl Isoamyl Ketone

Methyl isoamyl ketone (MIAK) shall conform to ASTM D2917.

2.3.3.5 Toluene

Toluene shall conform to ASTM D841.

2.3.4 Silane B

Silane B for Formula VZ-108d shall be N-beta-(aminoethyl)-gamma-



aminopropyltrimethoxy silane. Silquest A-1120, produced by Momentive Performance Materials Inc., and Silane Z-6020, produced by Dow Corning Corporation, are products of this type.

2.3.5 Propylene Oxide

Propylene oxide shall be a commercially pure product suitable for the intended use.

2.4 TESTING

2.4.1 Chromatographic Analysis

Solvents in vinyl paints and thinners shall be subject to analysis by programmed temperature gas chromatographic methods and/or spectrophotometric methods, employing the same techniques that give reproducible results on prepared control samples known to meet the specifications. If the solvent being analyzed is of the type consisting primarily of a single chemical compound or a mixture or two or more such solvents, interpretation of the test results shall take cognizance of the degree of purity of the individual solvents as commercially produced for the paint industry.

2.4.2 Vinyl Paints

Vinyl paints shall be subject to the following adhesion test. When V-766 or V-106 formulations are tested, 5 to 7 mils (dry) shall be spray applied to mild steel panels. The steel panels shall be essentially free of oil or other contaminants that may interfere with coating adhesion. The test panels shall be dry blast cleaned to a White Metal grade which shall be in compliance with SSPC SP 5/NACE No. 1. The surface shall have an angular profile of 2.0 to 2.5 mils as measured by ASTM D4417, Method C. When V-102 or V-103 formulations are tested, they shall be spray applied over 1.5 to 2.5 mils (dry) of V-766 or V-106 known to pass this test. When VZ-108 is tested, the coating shall be mixed in its proper proportions and then spray applied to a dry film thickness of 1.5 to 2.5 mils above the blast profile. The VZ-108 shall be top coated with a V-766 known to pass this test. In all cases, the complete system shall have a total dry film thickness of 5 to 7 mils above the blast profile. After being air dried for 2 hours at room temperature, the panel shall be dried in a vertical position for 16 hours at 120 degrees F. After cooling for 1 hour, the panel shall be immersed in tap water at 85 to 90 degrees F for 48 to 72 hours. Immediately upon removal, the panel shall be dried with soft cloth and examined for adhesion as follows: With a pocket knife or other suitable instrument, two parallel cuts at least 1 inch long shall be made 1/4 to 3/8 inch apart through the paint film to the steel surface. A third cut shall be made perpendicular to and passing through the end of the first two. With the tip of the knife blade, the film shall be loosened from the panel from the third cut between the parallel cuts for a distance of 1/8 to 1/4 inch. With the panel being held horizontally, the free end of the paint film shall be grasped between the thumb and forefinger and pulled vertically in an attempt to remove the film as a strip from between the first two cuts. The strip of paint film shall be removed at a rate of approximately 1/10 inch per second and shall be maintained in a vertical position during the process of removal. The adhesion is acceptable if the strip of paint breaks when pulled or if the strip elongates a minimum of 10 percent during its removal. Paints not intended to be self-priming shall exhibit no delamination from the primer.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING AND PREPARATION OF SURFACES TO BE PAINTED

3.1.1 General Requirements

Coated ferrous surfaces to be overcoated shall be power tool cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 3. The entire surface to be overcoated does not have to be power tool cleaned provided that all surfaces are free of all loose rust and loose paint. If pinpoint or general rusting appears, surfaces shall be reblasted and repainted at no added cost to the Government. Prior to the field application of subsequent coats, soiled areas of the shop coating shall be thoroughly cleaned and all welds or other unpainted or damaged areas shall be cleaned and coated in a manner to make them equivalent to adjacent, undamaged paint surfaces. Solvent clean all surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove deposits of grease or oil in accordance with SSPC SP 1, prior to mechanical cleaning. Solvent cleaning shall be accomplished with mineral spirits or other low toxicity solvents having a flash point above 100 degrees F. Use clean cloths and clean fluids to avoid leaving a thin film of greasy residue on the surfaces being cleaned. Protect items not to be prepared or coated from damage by the surface preparation methods. Machinery shall be protected against entry of blast abrasive and dust into working parts. Cleaning and painting shall be so programmed that dust or other contaminants from the cleaning process do not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces, and surfaces not intended to be painted shall be suitably protected from the effects of cleaning and painting operations. Welding of, or in the vicinity of, previously painted surfaces shall be conducted in a manner to prevent weld spatter from striking the paint and to otherwise reduce coating damage to a minimum; paint damaged by welding operations shall be restored to original condition. Surfaces to be painted that will be inaccessible after construction, erection, or installation operations are completed shall be painted before they become inaccessible.

3.2 PAINT APPLICATION

3.2.1 General

The finished coating shall be free from holidays, pinholes, bubbles, runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, excessive or unsightly brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and gloss. Application of initial or subsequent coatings shall not commence until the Contracting Officer has verified that atmospheric conditions and the surfaces to be coated are satisfactory. Each paint coat shall be applied in a manner that will produce an even, continuous film of uniform thickness. Edges, corners, crevices, seams, joints, welds, rivets, corrosion pits, and other surface irregularities shall receive special attention to ensure that they receive an adequate thickness of paint. Spray equipment shall be equipped with traps and separators and where appropriate, mechanical agitators, pressure gauges, pressure regulators, and screens or filters. Air caps, nozzles, and needles shall be as recommended by the spray equipment manufacturer for the material being applied. Airless-type spray equipment may be used only on broad, flat, or otherwise simply configured surfaces, except that it may be employed for general painting if the spray gun is equipped with dual or adjustable tips of proper types and orifice sizes. Airless-type equipment shall not be used for the application of vinyl paints.



3.2.2 Mixing and Thinning

Paints shall be thoroughly mixed, strained where necessary, and kept at a uniform composition and consistency during application. Dry-powder pigments specified to be added at the time of use shall, with the aid of powered stirrers, be incorporated into the vehicle or base paint in a manner that will produce a smooth, homogeneous mixture free of lumps and dry particles. Where necessary to suit conditions of the surface temperature, weather, and method of application, the paint may be thinned immediately prior to use. Thinning shall generally be limited to the addition of not more than 1 pint per gal of the proper thinner; this general limitation shall not apply when more specific thinning instructions are provided. Paint that has been stored at low temperature, shall be brought up to at least 70 degrees F before being mixed and thinned, and its temperature in the spray tank or other working container shall not fall below 60 degrees F during the application. Paint that has deteriorated in any manner to a degree that it cannot be restored to essentially its original condition by customary field-mixing methods shall not be used and shall be removed from the project site. Paint and thinner that is more than 1 year old shall be resampled and resubmitted for testing to determine its suitability for application. Moisture cure urethane paint shall be resampled and resubmitted for testing to determine its suitability for application whenever the paint is more than six months old as indicated by the date of manufacture on the container.

3.2.3 Time Between Surface Preparation and Painting

Surfaces that have been cleaned and/or otherwise prepared for painting shall be primed as soon as practicable after such preparation has been completed but, in any event, prior to any deterioration of the prepared surface.

3.2.4 Method of Paint Application

Unless otherwise specified, paint shall be applied by brush, roller, or spray to ferrous and nonferrous metal surfaces. Special attention shall be directed toward ensuring adequate coverage of edges, corners, crevices, pits, rivets, bolts, welds, and similar surface irregularities. Other methods of application to metal surfaces shall be subject to the specific approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.2.5 Coverage and Film Thickness

Film thickness or spreading rates shall be as specified hereinafter. The paint shall be applied at a rate consistent with the manufacturer's instructions. In any event, the combined coats of a specified paint system shall completely hide base surface and the finish coats shall completely hide undercoats of dissimilar color.

3.2.5.1 Measurement on Ferrous Metal

Where dry film thickness requirements are specified for coatings on ferrous surfaces, measurements shall be made with a gage qualified in accordance with paragraph Coating Thickness Gage Qualification. They shall be calibrated and used in accordance with ASTM D7091. Prior to each use the Base Metal Reading (BMR) shall be established for the gage as specified in the test method. Accuracy of the gage shall be verified using plastic shims as specified by the test method both prior to and following each set of measurements. Frequency of measurements shall be as recommended for



field measurements by ASTM D7091, except that measurements shall be performed on all areas of the structure being coated. Thickness measurements shall be reported as the mean for each spot determination.

3.2.6 Progress of Painting Work

Where field painting on any type of surface has commenced, the complete painting operation, including priming and finishing coats, on that portion of the work shall be completed as soon as practicable, without prolonged delays. Sufficient time shall elapse between successive coats to permit them to dry properly for recoating, and this period shall be modified as necessary to suit adverse weather conditions. Paint shall be considered dry for recoating when it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the finger, and the application of another coat of paint does not cause film irregularities such as lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. All coats of all painted surfaces shall be unscarred and completely integral at the time of application of succeeding coats. At the time of application of each successive coat, undercoats shall be cleaned of dust, grease, overspray, or foreign matter by means of airblast, solvent cleaning, or other suitable means. Cement and mortar deposits on painted steel surfaces, not satisfactorily removed by ordinary cleaning methods, shall be brush-off blast cleaned and completely repainted as required. Undercoats of high gloss shall, if necessary for establishment of good adhesion, be scuff sanded, solvent wiped, or otherwise treated prior to application of a succeeding coat. Field coats on metal shall be applied after erection except as otherwise specified and except for surfaces to be painted that will become inaccessible after erection.

3.2.7 Protection of Painted Surfaces

Where shelter and/or heat are provided for painted surfaces during inclement weather, such protective measures shall be maintained until the paint film has dried and discontinuance of the measures is authorized. Items that have been painted shall not be handled, worked on, or otherwise disturbed until the paint coat is fully dry and hard. All metalwork coated in the shop or field prior to final erection shall be stored out of contact with the ground in a manner and location that will minimize the formation of water-holding pockets; soiling, contamination, and deterioration of the paint film, and damaged areas of paint on such metalwork shall be cleaned and touched up without delay. The first field coat of paint shall be applied within a reasonable period of time after the shop coat and in any event before weathering of the shop coat becomes extensive.

3.2.8 Vinyl Paints

3.2.8.1 General

Vinyl paints shall be spray applied, except that areas inaccessible to spraying shall be brushed. All of the vinyl paints require thinning for spray application except the zinc-rich vinyl paint (Formula VZ 108d) which will normally require thinning only under certain weather conditions. Thinners for vinyl paints shall be as follows:

APPROXIMATE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (Degrees F)

Below 50 MEK



APPROXIMATE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (Degrees F)

50 - 70 MIBK

Above 70 MIAK

The amount of thinner shall be varied to provide a wet spray and avoid deposition of particles that are semidry when they strike the surface. Vinyl paints shall not be applied when the temperature of the ambient air and receiving surfaces is less than 35 degrees F nor when the receiving surfaces are higher than 125 degrees F. Each spray coat of vinyl paint shall consist of a preliminary extra spray pass on edges, corners, interior angles, pits, seams, crevices, junctions of joining members, rivets, weld lines, and similar surface irregularities followed by an overall double spray coat. A double spray coat of vinyl-type paint shall consist of applying paint to a working area of not less than several hundred square feet (meters) in a single, half-lapped pass, followed after drying to at least a near tack-free condition by another spray pass applied at the same coverage rate and where practicable at right angles to the first. Rivets, bolts, and similar surface projections shall receive sprayed paint from every direction to ensure complete coverage of all faces. Pits, cracks, and crevices shall be filled with paint insofar as practicable, but in any event, all pit surfaces shall be thoroughly covered and all cracks and crevices shall be sealed off against the entrance of moisture. Fluid and atomization pressures shall be kept as low as practicable consistent with good spraying results. Unless otherwise specified, not more than 2.0 mils, average dry film thickness, of vinyl paint shall be applied per double spray coat. Except where otherwise indicated, an undercoat of the vinyl-type paint may receive the next coat any time after the undercoat is tack-free and firm to the touch, provided that no speedup or delay in the recoating schedule shall cause film defects such as sags, runs, air bubbles, air craters, or poor intercoat adhesion. Neither the prime coat nor any other coat shall be walked upon or be subjected to any other abrading action until it has hardened sufficiently to resist mechanical damage.

3.2.8.2 Vinyl Zinc-Rich Primer

Primer shall be field mixed combining components A, B, and C. Mixing shall be in accordance with label instructions. After mixing, the paint shall be kept covered at all times to avoid contamination and shall be applied within 8 days after it is mixed. When the ambient and/or steel temperature is below about 80 degrees F, the paint will not normally require thinning; however, the paint shall at all times contain sufficient volatiles (thinners) to permit it to be satisfactorily atomized and to provide a wet spray and to avoid deposition of particles that are semidry when they reach the surface. The paint shall be stirred continuously during application at a rate that will prevent the zinc dust from settling. When spraying is resumed after any interruption of longer than 15 minutes, the entire length of the material hose shall be whipped vigorously until any settled zinc is redispersed. Long periods of permitting the paint to remain stagnant in the hose shall be avoided by emptying the hoses whenever the painting operation is to be suspended for more than 1 hour. The material (paint) hoses shall be kept as short as practicable, preferably not more than 50 feet in length. Equipment used for spraying this zinc primer shall not be used for spraying other vinyl-type paints without first being thoroughly cleaned, since many of the other paints will not tolerate zinc contamination; no type of hot spray shall be used. An average dry film thickness of up to 2.5 mils may be applied in one double-spray coat.



Unless specifically authorized, not more than 8 days shall elapse after application of a VZ-108d zinc-rich coat before it receives a succeeding coat.

3.2.8.3 Vinyl Paints

Vinyl Paints (Formulas V-102e, V-103c, V-106d, and V-766e) are ready-mixed paints designed to be spray applied over a wide range of ambient temperatures by field thinning with the proper type and amount of thinner. For spray application, they shall be thinned as necessary up to approximately 25 percent ( 1 quart/gallon of base paint) with the appropriate thinner; when ambient and steel temperatures are above normal, up to 40-percent thinning may be necessary for satisfactory application.

3.3 PAINT SYSTEMS APPLICATION

The required paint systems and the surfaces to which they shall be applied are shown in this paragraph, and/or in the drawings. Supplementary information follows.

3.3.1 Fabricated and Assembled Items

Items that have been fabricated and/or assembled into essentially their final form and that are customarily cleaned and painted in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice will be exempted from equivalent surface preparation and painting requirements described herein, provided that:

a. Surfaces primed (only) in accordance with such standard practices are compatible with specified field-applied finish coats.

b. Surfaces that have been primed and finish painted in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice are of acceptable color and are capable of being satisfactorily touched up in the field.

c. Items expressly designated herein to be cleaned and painted in a specified manner are not coated in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice if different from that specified herein.

3.3.2 Surface Preparation

The method of surface preparation and pretreatment shown in the tabulation of paint systems is for identification purposes only. Cleaning and pretreatment of surfaces prior to painting shall be accomplished in accordance with detailed requirements previously described.

3.3.3 System No. 3-A-Z

Paint shall be spray applied to an average dry film thickness of a minimum of 6.5 mils for the completed system, and the thickness at any point shall not be less than 5.5 mils. The dry film thickness of the zinc-rich coat shall be approximately 2.5 mils. Specified film thickness, including the prescribed total, shall be attained in any event, and any extra coats needed to attain specified thickness shall be applied at no additional cost to the Government. Attaining of the specified film thickness in fewer than the prescribed number of coats or spray passes will be acceptable provided heavier applications do not cause an increase in pinholes, bubbles, blisters, or voids in the dried film and also provided that not more than 2.0 mils (dry film thickness) per double spray coat nor more than 1.0 mil



per single spray pass of nonzinc paint shall be applied at one time.

3.3.4 Protection of Nonpainted Items and Cleanup

Walls, equipment, fixtures and all other items in the vicinity of the surfaces being painted shall be maintained free from damage by paint or painting activities. Paint spillage and painting activity damage shall be promptly repaired.

3.4 INSPECTION

Inspect and document all work phases and operations on a daily basis. Submit daily Inspection Reports. As a minimum the daily report shall contain the following:

a. Inspections performed, including the area of the structure involved and the results of the inspection.

b. Surface preparation operations performed, including the area of the structure involved, the mode of preparation, the kinds of solvent, abrasive, or power tools employed, and whether contract requirements were met.

c. Thinning operations performed, including thinners used, batch numbers, and thinner/paint volume ratios.

d. Application operations performed, including the area of the structure involved, mode of application employed, ambient temperature, substrate temperature, dew point, relative humidity, type of paint with batch numbers, elapsed time between surface preparation and application, elapsed time for recoat, condition of underlying coat, number of coats applied, and if specified, measured dry film thickness or spreading rate of each new coating.

3.5 PAINTING SCHEDULES

SYSTEM NO. 3-A-Z

Items or surfaces to be coated:

Aluminum Cell horizontal lines, Line Hooks and appurtenances

SURFACE PREPARATION

1st COAT 2nd COAT 3rd COAT 4th COAT

White metal blast cleaning

Vinyl zinc-rich VZZ-108d (double spray coat)

White Vinyl V-766e (double spray coat)

Aluminum Vinyl V-102e (double spray coat)

Aluminum Vinyl V-102e (as needed to obtain the required thickness)






SECTION 31 23 00

EXCAVATION AND FILL

02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 Hard Materials 1.2.2 Excavation 1.2.3 Dredging 1.2.4 Overburden 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Demolition Plan 1.3.2 Aggregate Fill Plan 1.4 SUMMARY OF WORK - TRM 303 LOCATIONS 1.4.1 Removal of Aggregate 1.4.2 Aggregate Fill 1.4.3 Dredging of soils 1.4.3.1 Cell Fill Process 1.5 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Satisfactory Materials 2.1.2 Unsatisfactory Materials 2.2 Gravel

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Removal of Existing Cells 3.1.1 Unsuitable Material 3.2 Construction of New Mooring Cells 3.3 FILLING AGGREGATE 3.4 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL




SECTION 31 23 00

EXCAVATION AND FILL02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM D2487 (2011) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Hard Materials

Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of "rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal.

1.2.2 Excavation

Removal of material.

1.2.3 Dredging

Removal of material.

1.2.4 Overburden

Overburden is defined as the sediment which has accumulated to form the river bottom.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Aggregate Fill Plan

1.3.1 Demolition Plan

Prepare and submit a Demolition Plan as required in Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION.



1.3.2 Aggregate Fill Plan

Prepare and submit an Aggregate Fill Plan. Provide a plan which discusses the means and methods. This includes but it not limited to rock type, gradation, equipment used and how the Contractor intends to fill the cells with the appropriate materials.

1.4 SUMMARY OF WORK - TRM 303 LOCATIONS

This section gives a brief overview of project facets to be conducted by the Contractor in this specification.

1.4.1 Removal of Aggregate

The Wheeler cells TRM 303.5 & 303.6 replacement job requires careful removal and stockpile of the aggregate by the Contractor. The Contractor shall perform this duty with minor loss of aggregate prior to removal of any sheet piles. All acquired aggregate fill shall be stored on Contractors barge for recycling. The recycled aggregate does not need to be washed prior to placement inside the new cells. New aggregate shall be cleaned and used appropriately.

1.4.2 Aggregate Fill

Fill material to be river run gravel 3 inches maximum size or No. 2 crushed limestone. A minimum crown of aggregate must be developed as specified in drawing set. Aggregate must be stockpiled properly. No storage locations will be provided to the Contractor. All materials must be stored on barge.

1.4.3 Dredging of soils

Dredging into the sediment subsurface will NOT be necessary at the cells location.

1.4.3.1 Cell Fill Process

Each cell shall be placed in the footprint of the existing cell. Contractor shall remove aggregate to approximate elevation of 536.00 as indicated by drawing set. Then the cellular sheet piles and template shall be placed and surveyed. Template shall be removed prior to diver inspection. A diver shall inspect the interior surface immidiately prior to tremie placement. Contractor shall place tremie seal at the appropriate elevation as indicated by the drawings. Once the concrete has adequately cured, aggregate may be placed. The cell may be filled to below the elevation of exterior fenders and rings. This will allow workers to enter the cell and install any plates or perform welding. The exterior rings and fenders shall then be installed. Then the interior top shall be filled with aggregate. Contractor may propose alternative means of Fill Process.

1.5 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

Base bids on the following criteria:

a. Surface and top of rock (if applicable) elevations are estimated from the drawings. Minor adjustments must be made depending on field findings.

b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will



not be encountered.

c. Material characteristics and depths are provided in the drawing set.

d. Hard materials and rock will be encountered as sighted in the probing logs.

e. Methods for removing aggregate materials shall be submitted for approval in the Excavation and Fill Work Plan.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Satisfactory Materials

Any materials classified by ASTM D2487 must be free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, and deleterious, or objectionable materials.

2.1.2 Unsatisfactory Materials

Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials. Unsatisfactory materials also include trash. Unsatisfactory material also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than specified. The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials.

2.2 Gravel

Clean, coarsely graded natural gravel, crushed stone shall conform to specifications, river run gravel with not more than 18% by weight smaller than No.10 Sieve size and not more than 10% by weight Larger than 3".

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Removal of Existing Cells

a. First, fill material shall be removed and stored on Contractors work barge for reuse in new cells. Only river-run gravel or crushed stone may be used as fill material in the new cells.

b. Secondly, steel fenders, ring assemblies, sheet piling and other metals shall be completely removed.

3.1.1 Unsuitable Material

Remove all trash, broken concrete, reinforcing bar and scrap steel from the demolished cells and properly dispose if encountered.

3.2 Construction of New Mooring Cells

a. New cells shall be constructed with vertical sheet piles PS 27.5 A572, Grade 50. Splicing of the sheets to obtain the required length is permited only when possible full lengths are not available. Sheet piling for new cells shall be driven to refusal, overburden encountered within the cells shall be removed. Elevations of Top of sheet piles shall be refer to drawings.



b. Fill material from existing cell shall be reused for the new cell. Contractor shall place reused material with new material to obtain required fill level. Placement of the existing cell fill material does not need to be mixed . Recycled material shall be prioritized to fill the cells.

3.3 FILLING AGGREGATE

Only after 1/3 of the height of the cell has been filled with aggregate can the Sheet Pile Template be removed. A minimum of 3 foot crown aggregate must be developed.Fill and backfill to elevations indicated. Contractor may propose alternative means and methods.

3.4 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Contractor is responsible for the removal of all waste or surplus materials. No disposal area will be provided.






SECTION 31 41 16

METAL SHEET PILING

08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.2 SHEET PILES GENERAL 1.2.1 Sheet Pile Imported 1.2.2 Splices 1.2.3 Underwater Welding 1.2.4 Removal of Sheet Piles at TRM 303 1.3 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES 1.3.1 Sheet Piles 1.3.2 Miscellaneous Metals 1.4 REFERENCES 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Material Certificates 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL SHEET PILING 2.1.1 Interlocks 2.2 APPURTENANT METAL MATERIALS 2.3 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS 2.3.1 Examination for Defects

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Pile Driving Equipment 3.2.1.1 Driving Hammers 3.2.1.2 Jetting Equipment 3.2.2 Placing and Driving 3.2.2.1 Placing 3.2.2.2 Driving 3.2.3 Cutting-Off and Splicing 3.2.4 Inspection of Driven Piling 3.2.5 Pulling and Redriving 3.3 REMOVAL 3.3.1 Pulling 3.3.2 Sorting, Cleaning, Inventorying and Storing 3.4 INSTALLATION RECORDS




SECTION 31 41 16

METAL SHEET PILING08/09

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SHEET PILES GENERAL

1.2.1 Sheet Pile Imported

Sheet piles shall not be provided to the Contractor. Contractor shall apply best practices to transporting sheet piles to the Mooring Cells locations.

1.2.2 Splices

New cells shall be constructed using PS 27.5 A572, Grade 50 sheet piles. Splicing of the sheets to obtain the required length is permited only when possible full lengths are not available. Sheet piling for new cells shall be driven to refusal, then spliced if necessary. All splices must be offset from one another minimumally by 10 ft. Top of sheet piles shall be approximately as shown of drawings. Splicing of Horizontal Fenders may be neccesary. Splices shall be staggered from the surrounding fenders by a distance of 10 horizontal feet.

1.2.3 Underwater Welding

Underwater welding shall be completed by the contractor when necessary. Welding shall be performed with respect to all codes and regulations appropriately.

1.2.4 Removal of Sheet Piles at TRM 303

There are 2 cells involved which shall be removed during this project. The sheet piling to be removed is approximately 76 sheets for the inner diameter and 96 sheets for the outer diameter. The sheets are approximately 40 and 43 feet in length, respectively. Drawings shall be provided of approximate field conditions. Several sheet piles may be damaged. Sheet piling may be removed only after the aggregate fill has been properly removed and stored for new cell.

1.3 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES

Sheet piling included in each Single job payment item consists of piling acceptably installed and removed. Installed quantities consists of all piling including fabricated sections driven between the required top and bottom elevations of pilings plus any additions thereto resulting from changes in design or alignment as provided in paragraph DRIVING.



1.3.1 Sheet Piles

The cells for this project must be located in the same foot print as the cell which was removed. Approximately number of sheets, length and total linear feet per cell installed is detailed on the drawing. Pile tip elevation and top of cell are indicated on drawing set. Practical refusal shall be defined as 8 blows per inch of penetration. lengths may vary due to elevation of refusal.

1.3.2 Miscellaneous Metals

Steel Fenders shall be installed as shown in the contract drawings. Ring Assembly and vertical fenders shall be placed according to drawings. All mooring rings, bolts, nuts and spacers shall be installed according to drawings.

1.4 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016) Structural Welding Code - Steel


ASTM A572/A572M (2015) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Metal Sheet Piling; G

Detail drawings for pile driving sequences and location of installed piling and master piling shall be submitted. Detail drawings shall include details and dimensions of templates, master piles, current deflectors or any other temporary guide structures for installing piling. Detail drawings shall provide details of the method of handling piling to prevent permanent deflection, distortion or damage to piling interlocks as well as method of keeping piling plumb and on driving line while driving.

SD-03 Product Data

Driving; G

Records of the sheet piling driving operations shall be



submitted after driving is completed. These records shall provide a system of identification which shows the disposition of approved piling in the work, driving equipment performance data, piling penetration rate data, piling dimensions and top and bottom elevations of installed piling. The format for driving records shall be as directed.

Pile Driving Equipment; G

Complete descriptions of sheet piling driving equipment including hammers, extractors, protection caps and other installation appurtenances shall be submitted for approval prior to commencement of work.

Pulling and Redriving; G

The proposed method of pulling sheet piling shall be submitted and approved prior to pulling any piling.

SD-05 Design Data

Splices; G

Provide a means and methods for all splicing if conducted. Provide permits or licensing for individuals tasked with all welding conducted. Splicing of the sheets to obtain the required length is permited only when possible full lengths are not available. Sheet piling for new cells shall be driven to refusal, then spliced if necessary. All splices must be offset minimumally by 10 ft. Provide detail information regarding location of all splice welds once welding is completed for as built drawing set. Splicing of sheet piles shall not be permitted below highwater elevation. All splices shall be conducted above water surface for visual inspection.

Metal Sheet Piling; G New cells shall be constructed with PS 27.5 A572, Grade 50 sheet

piles.


Pile Driving Record


1.6.1 Material Certificates

Visual inspection must be conducted of all sheet pile prior to use. Certify that all sheet pile acquired is of good condition and can be used.


Materials delivered to the site shall be undamaged. Store and handle sheet piling in the manner recommended by the manufacturer to prevent permanent deflection, distortion or damage to the interlocks; as a minimum, support on level blocks or racks spaced not more than 10 feet apart and not more than 2 feet from the ends. Storage of sheet piling should also facilitate required inspection activities and prevent damage to coatings and corrosion prior to installation. Handle sheet piling over 50 feet in length using a



minimum of two pickup points.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL SHEET PILING

Submit detail drawings for sheet piling, including fabricated sections, showing complete piling dimensions and details, driving sequence and location of installed piling.

a. Include in the drawings details of top protection, special reinforcing tips, tip protection, lagging, splices, fabricated additions to plain piles, cut-off method, corrosion protection, and dimensions of templates and other temporary guide structures for installing piling. Provide details of the method for handling piling to prevent permanent deflection, distortion or damage to piling interlocks.

b. Metal sheet piling shall be government provided; sections conforming to ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50, Type PS 27.5 , interlocked joint strength in tension.

2.1.1 Interlocks

The interlocks of sheet piling shall be free-sliding, provide a swing angle suitable for the intended installation but not less than 10 degrees when interlocked, and maintain continuous interlocking when installed.

2.2 APPURTENANT METAL MATERIALS

Provide metal plates, shapes, bolts, nuts, rivets and other appurtenant fabrication and installation materials conforming to manufacturer's standards and to the requirements specified in the respective sheet piling standards and in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

2.3 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

Requirements for material tests, workmanship and other measures for quality assurance shall be as specified and in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

2.3.1 Examination for Defects

All sheet piling shall be further examined for laminations, camber, swing,slidability, and other defects by the Contractor and Contracting Officer, COR or Structural Engineer. Swing is defined as the ability of a sheet pile to freely rotate horizontally about the centerline of interlocks to correspond to the required geometry of the cell. Slidability is defined as the ability of a pile to move vertically in the interlocks, to grade, without assistance of a pile hammer. Camber is defined as the simple regular curve measured at the mid point between the ends of a full length sheet pile in the direction parallel to the plane of the web. The piling shall be subject to the following tests:

Openings must not exceed 0.0625" over gage for one continuous foot in 10.0' with no more than 3 incidents in 99.0' lengths.

Openings that are tight must either be repaired or replaced.

All pieces with camber over 2" will be rejected.



Pieces with camber between 1 3/8" and 2" will be set aside for consideration of a demonstration test.

Sweep is defined as the simple regular curve measured at the mid-point between the ends of a full length sheet pile in the direction perpendicularto the plane of the web. Each sheet pile shall be inspected by the Contractor for excessive sweep. Excessive sweep is considered to be an amount of deflection that would negatively impact the setting and driving of the sheet pile.

Any sheet piling that does not satisfy visual inspection must not be used. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

Perform in accordance with Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL. Pre-excavation is not be permitted. No excavation shall be conducted.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Pile Driving Equipment

Submit complete descriptions of sheet piling driving equipment including hammers, extractors, protection caps and other installation appurtenances, prior to commencement of work. Descriptive information includes manufacturer's name, model numbers, capacity, rated energy, hammer details, cushion material, helmet, and templates. Provide pile driving equipment conforming to the following requirements.

3.2.1.1 Driving Hammers

Hammers shall be steam, air, or diesel drop, single-acting, double-acting, differential-acting , or vibratory type. The driving energy of the hammers shall be recommended by the manufacturer for the piling weights and subsurface materials to be encountered. Repair damage to piling caused by use of a pile hammer with excess delivered force or energy.

3.2.1.2 Jetting Equipment

Jetting is not be permitted.

3.2.2 Placing and Driving

3.2.2.1 Placing

Any excavation required within the area where sheet pilings are to be installed shall be completed prior to placing sheet pilings. Pilings properly placed and driven shall be interlocked throughout their length with adjacent pilings to form a continuous diaphragm throughout the length or run of piling wall.

a. Pilings shall be carefully located as indicated. Pilings shall be placed plumb with out-of-plumbness not exceeding 1/8 inch per foot of length and true to line. Place the pile so the face is not more than 6 inches from vertical alignment at any point. Top of pile at elevation of cut-off shall be within 1/2 inch horizontally and 2 inches vertically of the location indicated. Manipulation of piles to force



them into position is not be permitted. Check all piles for heave. Redriven all heaved piles to the required tip elevation.

b. Provide temporary templates to guide structures ensuring the pilings are placed and driven in the correct location. Use a system of structural framing sufficiently rigid to resist lateral and driving forces and to adequately support the sheet piling until design tip elevation is achieved. Use multiple templates as necessary, however, only one template is required. Templates shall not move when supporting sheet piling. Fit templates with wood blocking to bear against the web of each alternate sheet pile and hold the sheet pile at the design location alignment. Provide outer template straps or other restraints as necessary to prevent the sheets from warping or wandering from the alignment. Mark template for the location of the leading edge of each alternate sheet pile. If in view, also mark the second level to assure that the piles are vertical and in position. If two guide marks cannot be seen, other means shall be used to keep the sheet pile vertical along its leading edge.

3.2.2.2 Driving

Submit records of the completed sheet piling driving operations, including a system of identification which shows the disposition of approved piling in the work, driving equipment performance data, piling penetration rate data, piling dimensions and top and bottom elevations of installed piling. The format for driving records shall be as directed. Prior to driving pilings in water, paint a horizontal line on both sides of each piling at a fixed distance from the bottom so that it is visible above the water line after installation. This line shall indicate the profile of the bottom elevation of installed pilings and potential problem areas can be identified by abrupt changes in its elevation. Drive pilings with the proper size hammer and by approved methods so as not to subject the pilings to damage and to ensure proper interlocking throughout their lengths.

a. Maintain driving hammers in proper alignment during driving operations by use of leads or guides attached to the hammer. Caution shall be taken in the sustained use of vibratory hammers when a hard driving condition is encountered to avoid interlock-melt or damages. Discontinue the use of vibratory hammers and impact hammers employed when the penetration rate due to vibratory loading is one foot or less per minute.

b. Employ a protecting cap in driving when using impact hammers to prevent damage to the tops of pilings. Use cast steel shoe to prevent damage to the tip of the sheet piling. Remove and replace pilings damaged during driving or driven out of interlock at the Contractor's expense. Store Government furnished pilings, damaged during driving, at the site as directed.

c. Drive pilings without the aid of a water jet.

d. Take adequate precautions to ensure that pilings are driven plumb. Where possible, drive with the ball end leading. If an open socket is leading, a bolt or similar object placed in the bottom of the interlock minimizes packing material into it and ease driving for the next sheet. If at any time the forward or leading edge of the piling wall is found to be out-of-plumb in the plane of the wall the piling being driven shall be driven to the required depth and tapered pilings shall be provided and driven to interlock with the out-of-plumb leading edge



or other approved corrective measures shall be taken to insure the plumbness of succeeding pilings. The maximum permissible taper for any tapered piling shall be 1/8 inch per foot of length.

e. If obstructions restrict driving a piling to the specified penetration, the obstructions shall be removed or penetrated with a chisel beam. If the Contractor demonstrates that removal or penetration is impractical, make changes in the design alignment of the piling structure as directed to ensure the adequacy and stability of the structure. Pilings shall be driven to depths shown and shall extend up to the elevation indicated for the top of pilings. Piling driven to rock shall be seated individually on the rock.

3.2.3 Cutting-Off and Splicing

Pilings driven to refusal or to the point where additional penetration cannot be attained and are extending above the required top elevation in excess of the specified tolerance shall be cut off to the required elevation. Pilings driven below the required top elevation and pilings damaged by driving and cut off to permit further driving shall be extended as required to reach the top elevation by splicing when directed at no additional cost to the Government. If directed, pilings shall be spliced as required to drive them to depths greater than shown and extend them up to the required top elevation.

a. Pilings adjoining spliced pilings shall be full length unless otherwise approved. If splices are allowed in adjoining pilings, the splices shall be spaced at least 10 feet apart. Splicing of pilings shall be as indicated. Ends of pilings to be spliced shall be squared before splicing to eliminate dips or camber. Pilings shall be spliced together with concentric alignment of the interlocks so that there are no discontinuities, dips or camber at the abutting interlocks. Spliced pilings shall be free sliding and able to obtain the maximum swing with contiguous pilings. Welding of splices shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS. Shop and field welding, qualification of welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

b. The tops of pilings excessively battered during driving shall be trimmed when directed, at no cost to the Government. Piling cut-offs except for Government furnished pilings shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

c. Cut holes in pilings for bolts, rods, drains or utilities in a neat and workmanlike manner, as shown or as directed. Use a straight edge in cuts made by burning to avoid abrupt nicks. Bolt holes in steel piling shall be drilled or may be burned and reamed by approved methods which do not damage the surrounding metal. Bolt holes in aluminum pilings shall be drilled. Holes other than bolt holes shall be reasonably smooth and the proper size for rods and other items to be inserted. Do not use explosives for cutting.

3.2.4 Inspection of Driven Piling

Perform continuous inspection during pile driving. Inspect all piles for compliance with tolerance requirements. Bring any unusual problems which may occur to the attention of the Contracting Officer. Inspect the interlocked joints of driven pilings extending above ground. Pilings found to be out of interlock shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's



expense. Use divers to inspect underwater interlocked joints of sheet piling. Government divers may also inspect the interlocked joints. The inspection of cells shall be performed after driving is completed, prior to filling each cell, and within 48 hours after filling each cell.

3.2.5 Pulling and Redriving

Submit the proposed method of pulling sheet piling, prior to pulling any piling. Pull, as directed, selected pilings after driving to determine the condition of the underground portions of pilings. Any piling so pulled and found to be damaged, to the extent that its usefulness in the structure is impaired, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Pilings pulled and found to be in satisfactory condition shall be redriven when directed. Government furnished pilings pulled and not redriven shall be stored as directed.

3.3 REMOVAL

The removal of sheet pilings shall consist of pulling, sorting, inventorying and storing previously installed sheet pilings as shown and directed.

3.3.1 Pulling

The method of pulling piling shall be approved. Provide pulling holes in pilings, as required. Extractors shall be of suitable type and size. Care shall be exercised during pulling of pilings to avoid damaging piling interlocks and adjacent construction. If the Contracting Officer determines that adjacent permanent construction has been damaged during pulling, the Contractor is required to repair this construction at no additional cost to the Government. Pull pilings one sheet at a time. Pilings fused together shall be separated prior to pulling, unless the Contractor demonstrates, to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer, that the pilings cannot be separated. The Contractor will not be paid for the removal of pilings damaged beyond structural use due to proper care not being exercised during pulling.

3.3.2 Sorting, Cleaning, Inventorying and Storing

Pulled pilings shall be sorted, cleaned, inventoried and stored by type into groups as:

a. Piling usable without reconditioning.

b. Piling requiring reconditioning.

c. Piling damaged beyond structural use.

3.4 INSTALLATION RECORDS

Maintain a pile driving record for each sheet pile driven. Indicate on the installation record: installation dates and times, type and size of hammer, rate of operation, total driving time, dimensions of driving helmet and cap used, blows required per foot for each foot of penetration, final driving resistance in blows for final 6 inches, pile locations, tip elevations, ground elevations, cut-off elevations, and any reheading or cutting of piles. Record any unusual pile driving problems during driving. Submit complete records to the Contracting Officer.



